MIMAKI CJV30-60 Series Service Manual

MIMAKI ENGINERRING CO., LTD.
URL: ht t p: / / www. mi maki . co. j p/ engl i sh/ t op

Service Documents
D500387
CJV30- 60/ 100/130/ 160
TPC-1000
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
More Service Manuals at www.service-manual.net
WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET
2009 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Change Tracking P.1
Service Documents > Maintenance Manual Change Tracking
Maintenance Manual Change Tracking
Date 2010.11.05 Manual Ver. 1.30 Remark
Status Index Rev. Changes
Modified 1.3.1 1.2 Flow of ink supply control is moved to the next page
Modified 1.3.1 1.1 7-color ink set and 8-color ink set is added
Added 1.3.1 1.0 7-color ink set and 8-color ink set is added to ink system configuration
Modified 1.3.2 1.2 No.18 is added
Modified 1.3.3 1.2 7-color ink set and 8-color ink set is added
Modified 1.3.4 1.1 REINSERT CARTRIDGE is added
Modified 1.3.6 1.3 Updating of the amount of remaining ink is move to next page
Modified 1.3.6 1.2 Table is added
Modified 1.3.9 1.2 8-colors setting value is added
Modified 1.3.11 1.0 Added
Modified 2.2.1 1.2 Color is added
Modified 4.2.13 1.1 Step2: LCD display is changed
Modified 5.1.1 1.3 6-color+W, 7-color, 8-color are added
Modified 5.1.2 1.3 6-color+W, 7-color, 8-color are added
Modified
5.1.3 1.2
6-color+W, 7-color, 8-color are added
Modified 5.2.5 1.1 7-color, 8-color are added
Modified 6.2.9 1.2 7-color, 8-color are added
Modified
7.1.2 1.3 No.120: Remedy id changed
No.208: Added
Modified 7.1.3 1.3 No.49: Added
No.50: Added
Modified 8.2.1 1.1 Changed
Added 8.2.3 1.0 Changed
1.2.10 Added 1.0 "Aqua->Sol EXCHG" was added.
1.3.3 Modified 1.1 The change of order of priority for cartridge.
1.3.3 Added 1.0 "Regarding the order of priority when using MBIS1" is added.
1.3.10 Added 1.0 "Ink expiry month and extend expiry month" is added.
5.2.1 ~
5.2.6
Modified 1.1 Added information to refer to [4.5.2 Electric charge checking when replace the Electrical
Parts] regarding Warning.
6.5.1 ~
6.5.16
Modified 1.X Added information to refer to [4.5.2 Electric charge checking when replace the Electrical
Parts] regarding Warning.
6.5.17 Added 1.0 New item mReplacement procedure for fuse of the Main PCBnwas added.
7.1.2 Modified 1.3 Error 205 was added.
Error 207 was added.
7.1.3 Added List of Warning Messages Added,Reviewed.
7.2.3 Modified 1.3 The description of " Print head breakage details" is changed.
7.2.5 Added 1.0 New item mHeater temperature does not going upnwas added.
8.2.3 Modified Operation Flow "Aqua->Sol EXCHG" was added.
8.2.4 Modified Operation Flow "CART.PRIORITY" was added.
all Added TPC(-1000) was added.
sheet and paper were replaced to media. (4.2.8, 4.2.9, 4.2.10, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 5.1.1,
5.1.2, 5.1.3, 5.1.5, 5.1.6, 5.1.7, 5.1.36, 7.1.2, 7.1.3)
1.3.1 Added 1.1 Note for TPC was added.
1.3.6 Added 1.2 TPC-1000 was added on the table.
2.2.1
4.2.6
4.2.19
6.2.9
7.1.4
Modified 1.1 Model name was changed to this machine.
4.2.8
4.2.9
4.2.10
Modified 1.1
1.2
1.2
Description of pen line film was deleted.
4.2.11 Added 1.2 Description was added on Important.
4.2.12 Added 1.1 Description was added on Important.
5.1.1 Modified 1.2 On step6, Sublimation5 was changed to Sb51, Sb52.
5.2.1 Added 1.0 New item [Determining COM short circuit] was added.
5.2.2 Added 1.0 New item [Checking Damage of the Print Heads] was added.
5.2.3 Added 1.0 New item [Checking Damage of the Main PCB ASSY] was added.
5.2.4 Added 1.0 New item [Checking Damage of the Ink Slider PCB] was added.
5.2.5 Added 1.0 New item [Checking Conduction of HDC FFC COM Line] was added.
5.2.6 Added 1.0 New item [Checking Conduction of HDC FFC Data Line] was added.
6.5.2 Modified 1.2 Description of Hint was changed.
7.1.1 Added 1.1 On the figure, Refer to 7.2 was added.
7.1.2 P1 Added 1.2 Added information to refer to [7.2.3 Electrical Troubleshooting] regarding Error 07.
7.1.2 P5 Added 1.2 Added information to refer to [7.2.3 Electrical Troubleshooting] regarding Error 205.
7.1.4 Added 1.0 New item [Y belt derailment or damage] was added.
New item [The power cannot be turned on ], [Abnormal discharging] was added.
7.2.3 Added 1.0 New item [Electrical Troubleshooting] was added.
7.2.4 Added 1.0 New item [Y Drive Belt Damage] was added.
7.1.2 P3 Added 1.2 Added information to refer to [7.2.2 Media Attachment to the Platen] regarding Motor Error.
7.1.4 Added 1.0 New item [Trouble with No Messages] was added.
7.2.1 Added 1.0 New item [Y Drive Belt Noise] was added.
7.2.2 Added 1.0 New item [Media Attachment to the Platen] was added.
Index Status Rev. Changes
1.1.1 Revised 1.10 [Indication on LCD] DPC PDC
Revised 1.10 [Indication on LCD] V1.00 V1.00.0
Added 1.10 Step 6: When the fuse F13 of the main PCB assy is blown, ...
1.1.2 Revised 1.10 [Indication on LCD] DPC PDC
Revised 1.10 [Indication on LCD] V1.00 V1.00.0
Added 1.10 Step 4: When the fuse F13 of the main PCB assy is blown, ...
Added 1.10 Step 5: (Except firmware update)
1.1.3 Added 1.10 Step 4: (Only when MAIN power is on)
Added 1.10 Step 5: (Refer to 1.1.6 Operation for Connecting the Heads)
1.1.4 Revised 1.10 Step 2, 4: When it cannot be detected ...
When detection is impossible or the number of pinch rollers is not recognized, ...
Added 1.10 Tips Box: (Only during Step 3 above)
1.1.5 Revised 1.10 Tips Box: [PRINT MODE] [CUT MODE] was switched.
The machine draws a stored pattern which can be selected ...
1.1.8 Added 1.10 Tips Box: In service mode, the buzzer sounds ...
1.2.3 Added 1.10 Step 3: Press [FUNCTION], and the maintenance washing liquid ...
1.2.9 Revised 1.10 [Indication on LCD]: All the indications on the display revised
Revised 1.10 Description of status No1-1: ... near full or more. ... full or more.
Erased 1.10 Step 2: The [!WASTE TANK] is displayed in LOCAL mode.
Revised 1.10 Important Box: ... is cumulatively counted in this unit.
... is not cumulatively counted in this unit.
1.3.2 Revised 1.10 In Table: Execution status when an error occurs (5, 6, 7, 8)
1.3.6 Revised 1.10 In Table: Ink consumption through one supply path
1.3.9 Erased 1.10 Item: Selection of model
2.1.1 Revised 1.10 Connection Diagram Inside the Main Body revised
2.3.1 Added 1.10 Volume specification: Type
Added 1.10 Fuse rating
2.3.2 Added 1.10 Fuse rating
2.3.6 Revised 1.10 List of connectors CN7: AUX. P Head Lock Solenoid
2.3.7 Revised 1.10 List of connectors CN19: Debug Monitor Not equipped
CPLD writing AUX.
Revised 1.10 List of connectors CN21: X-axis Motor AUX.
2.3.8 Revised 1.10 List of connectors CN14: Debug Connector None
Added 1.10 List of connectors CN14: AUX.
2.3.11 Revised 1.10 List of connectors CN2: For CPLD writing None
Added 1.10 List of connectors CN2: AUX.
3.1.1 Revised 1.10 Item: Cartridge Assy Print Head Unit Assy
3.1.2 Revised 1.10 Work operation 1: station cover U and ... station cover U, W ink guard and ...
Revised 1.10 Work operation 3: ... while it is pressed against the innermost part.
... while pushing it toward you.
3.1.3 Revised 1.10 Work operation 1: Remove the ICU cover F, ICU cover R, ... Remove the ICU cover, ...
3.1.4 Revised 1.10 Section changed: 3.3. Driving Parts 3.1. Ink Related Parts
Revised 1.10 Work operation 1: ... C station cover. ... C station cover 2.
3.2.1 Added 1.10 Work operation 4: In installation, pay attention to harness treatment.
Revised 1.10 Work operation 7: 7.0 mm 8.8 mm
1.10 Work operation 8 to 10: The order of work items changed and items added
3.2.2 Revised 1.10 Work operation 1: ... auto cutter assy. ... S guide.
1.10 Work operation 4: 7.0 mm 8.8 mm
Added 1.10 Work operation 4: (If necessary, check to see if the magnet catcher...
1.10 Work operation 6: Install the S guide while pushing it to the left.
Erased 1.10 Caution Box: Be sure to wear protective glasses and working gloves...
3.2.3 Added 1.10 Work operation 4: Set the pressure of all the clamps to Middle,...
Revised 1.10 Work operation 6: Adjust the pen stroke at... Adjust so that the pen stroke is...
1.10 Work operation 7: 7.0 mm 8.8 mm
Added 1.10 Work operation 11, 12
1.10 Important Box: Once the S guide is removed, ...
3.3.2 Added 1.10 Work operation 1: ...and D BKT cover.
3.3.3 Erased 1.10 Work operation 4: Greasing of Y drive belt
3.3.5 Added 1.10 Work operation 5: GR/PR adjustment
1.10 Work operation 6: Install all the covers temporarily first ...
3.4.1 Revised 1.10 Work operation 3/4: Mounting / Removal
Erased 1.10 Caution Box: Be sure to wear protective glasses and working gloves...
4.1.1 Erased 1.10 Adjustment item:Adjustment of light pointer offset
Adjustment of cutting position
Work contents: Pulley BTG removal or replacement
Paper sensor
4.2.2 Added 1.10 Tips Box: The same adjusted value is applied to...
4.2.3 Added 1.10 Important Box: Make adjustment with [EXPANDS] of...
Erased 1.10 Tips Box: If the unit is changed to inch,...
4.2.5 Revised 1.10 Adjustment procedure 4: Vertically shifts the cap. Shifts the cap.
1.10 Adjustment procedure 5: Horizontally shifts the head. Horizontally shifts the wiper.
4.2.8 Page deleted Remarks and Examples of inputting a compensation value
4.2.9 Revised 1.10 Function: 400g 350g
Procedure 6: 400g 350g
4.2.10 Revised 1.10 Function: Plots 11 square patterns using the 11 pen landing values of 0 to 200, respectively. (20 steps)
Plots 11 square patterns at the positions of different pen landing values in steps of 20, start-
ing at the first pen landing point.
Added 1.10 Function (The content of adjustment...): #LANDING UP POSITION
Added 1.10 Procedure 3 to 6: Because of addition of #LANDING UP POSITION
Revised 1.10 Procedure 7: ... the 11 pen landing values (0, 20, 40 ... 200) of 0 to 200 currently being set.
... different pen landing values in steps of 20, starting with the currently set pen landing value.
4.2.11 Added 1.10 Tips Box: Pressing [FUNCTION] will release...
4.2.14 Revised 1.10 Function: If a hunting noise is heard when the X-axis motor and ...
If hunting occurs or a hunting noise is heard when the X-axis motor and/or ...
Added 1.10 Procedures for STOP ADJUST 2: Key operation (ENTER, END)
Erased 1.10 Procedures for STOP ADJUST 2 (LCD side): Motor rotation
Revised 1.10 Procedures for X MOVING ADJUT Step 2 to 4: (Procedure reviewed and descriptions added)
Revised 1.10 Procedures for Y MOVING ADJUT Step 2 to 4: (Procedure reviewed and descriptions added)
4.2.15 Revised 1.10 Totally revised because of change in procedure
4.3.1 Added 1.10 Important Box: Set the pressure of all the clamps to Middle, ...
4.3.2 Revised 1.10 Totally revised because of elimination of height adjustment (elimination of use of tool)
5.1.1 Added 1.10 Step2, 4: Because of addition of resolution 360x360
5.1.2 Added 1.10 Step2, 4: Because of addition of resolution 360x360
5.1.5 Revised 1.10 Step1: Speed designation Set value 150 mm/s 500 mm/s
Revised 1.10 Step2: Acceleration designation Set value 0.50 G 2.00 G
Revised 1.10 Step3: Moving amount designation Set value 500000 mm Mechanical limit size
5.1.7 Revised 1.10 Step1: Speed designation Set value 150 mm/s 500 mm/s
Revised 1.10 Step2: Acceleration designation Set value 0.50 G 2.00 G
Revised 1.10 Step3: Moving amount designation Set value 500000 mm Mechanical limit size
5.1.30 Added 1.10 Function: Use [FUNCTION] to move the cursor...
6.3.3 Added 1.10 Important Box: In reassembly, pay attention to harness treatment.
6.4.7 Revised 1.10 Disassembly procedure: Procedure reviewed because of the elimination of the removal of X
pulley and connecting shaft
Added 1.10 Work procedures 6: Note on reassembly
6.4.11 Added 1.10 Tips Box: For easy work, set clamp pressure to Low ...
6.5.2 Erased 1.10 Important Box: After assembly,...
6.5.5 Added 1.10 Caution Box: Be sure to turn off the main circuit breaker...
6.5.9 Added 1.10 Warning Box: After turning off the sub and main power switches, ...
6.5.10 Erased 1.10 Caution Box: Also, there is a possibility of electric shock because of...
6.5.13 Page added 1.00 Fan Motor
6.6.1 Revised 1.10 Sensor Layout revised
7.1.2 Revised 1.10 Rearranged according to error Nos.
Added 1.10 Error No. 12: Inappropriate instruction was given concerning the printer controlling.
Erased 1.10 Error No. 25(FULL-SPEED): (Full-Speed Mode connection)
Added 1.10 Error No. 35-C: Cause Since take-up is executed, ...
Remedy Auto cutting is not performed if take-up timing is ...
7.1.2 Added 1.10 Error No. 40 to 43: 2. Make sure that the media is ...
Added 1.10 Error No. 170: Remedy
Added 1.10 Error No. 180: Remedy
Added 1.10 Error No. 203: SDRAM SIZE
Added 1.10 Error No. 205: 47V HEAD VOLTAGE
Added 1.10 Error No. 206: MAIN PCB
Added 1.10 Error No. 211 (HeadWARM.TEMP., BREAK, THERM): *This error is never displayed when ...
7.1.3 Revised 1.10 Error No. 5: !Do TEST DRAW !CONFIRM TEST PRINT
Revised 1.10 Error No. 5: The nozzle recovery cannot be expected because the...
Sleep refresh or cleaning was not performed when power was...
Revised 1.10 Error No. 7: The left screen shows that... This example shows that...
Revised 1.10 Error No. 8: The left screen shows that... This example shows that...
Revised 1.10 Error No. 21: ... has been completely. has been completely used up.
Added 1.10 Error No. 4x~4x: Newly added
Added 1.10 Error No. xx~xx: Newly added
8.2.2 Erased 1.10 [PRIORITY MARGIN]
Added 1.10 [SETUP COPY]
8.2.3 Added 1.10 [CR.MAINTENANCE Remove the cover]
8.2.4 Added 1.10 [STAMP SETUP]: *Displayed by press of [FUNCTION] ...
8.3.2 Added 1.10 [SETUP RESET]: *Except when PEN is selected
Erased 1.10 [PRIORITY]
Added 1.10 [SETUP COPY]
8.3.3 Revised 1.10 [MAINTENANCE STEP SIZE] (Moved from SETUP (CUT mode))
8.4.1 Added 1.10 [CONFIRM. FEED FEED] Choices: ON/OFF OFF/ 10 to 500
Revised 1.10 MARGIN (Moved from SETUP)
8.5.1 Erased 1.10 [#ADJUST POINTER OFFSET]
Erased 1.10 [#CAPPING WiperPOS(Y)]
Added 1.10 [#LANDING UP POSITION]
Released New issued
2009 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Contents R.1.2 P.1
Maintenance Manual > Maintenance Manual Contents
Model CJV30/TPC Issued 2008.08.04 Revised 2009.08.27 F/W ver. 2.00 Remark
Maintenance Manual Contents 1.2
Rev.
1 Operating Principle
1.1 Basic Operation
1.1.1 Main Switch Power ON
1.1.2 Sub Switch Power ON
1.1.3 Initial Machine Operation
1.1.4 Detection of a Media Width
1.1.5 Clamp Pressure Switching
1.1.6 Operation for Connecting the Heads
1.1.7 Mark Detection
1.1.8 Main Switch Power OFF
1.2 Maintenance Function
1.2.1 CARRIAGE OUT
1.2.2 WIPER REPLACE
1.2.3 NOZZLE WASH
1.2.4 PUMP TUBE WASH
1.2.5 CR.MAINTENANCE
1.2.6 FILL UP INK
1.2.7 DISCHARGE&WASH
1.2.8 Maintenance Washing Liquid Filling
and Discharge
1.2.9 Waste Ink Tank Warning
1.2.10 Aqua->Sol EXCHG.
1.3 Ink System
1.3.1 Configuration
1.3.2 Ink System Error Monitoring
1.3.3 Supply Cartridge Control and
Selection
1.3.4 Cartridge LED Control
1.3.5 Supply Valve Control
1.3.6 Monitoring of the Amount of
Remaining Ink
1.3.7 Use-up Cleaning
1.3.8 Ink Suction and Discharge Control
1.3.9 Initial Filling
1.3.10 Expiry month and extension of expiry
month for ink
1.4 Print & Cut
2 Electrical Parts
2.1 Block Diagram
2.1.1 Connection Diagram Inside the Main
Body
2.1.2 Connection Diagram Outside the Main
Body
2.2 Operating Description
2.2.1 Operation Explanation
2.3 Circuit Board Specifications
2.3.1 Power Supply PCB Assy
2.3.2 Main PCB Assy
2.3.3 PRAM PCB Assy
2.3.4 Regenerative Resistivity PCB Assy
2.3.5 Cutter Driver PCB Assy
2.3.6 Station PCB Assy
2.3.7 X-axis Motor Relay PCB Assy
2.3.8 Ink Slider PCB Assy
2.3.9 Cutter Slider PCB Assy
2.3.10 Head Memory PCB Assy
2.3.11 LED PCB Assy
2.3.12 Keyboard PCB Assy
2.3.13 Take-up PCB Assy
3 Workflow
3.1 Ink Related Parts
3.1.1 Replacement of the Head Unit
3.1.2 Replacement of the Cap Assy
3.1.3 Replacement of the Cartridge Assy
3.1.4 Replacement of the Wiper Unit
3.2 Cut Head Carriage
3.2.1 Replacement of the Pen Assy and
LED Pointer
3.2.2 Replacement of the Auto Cutter Assy
3.2.3 Replacement of the Mark Assy
3.3 Driving Parts
3.3.1 Replacement of the X-axis Motor
3.3.2 Replacement of the Y-axis Motor
3.3.3 Replacement of the Y Drive Belt
3.3.4 Replacement of the Linear Encoder
Scale
3.3.5 Replacement the GR Roller Assy
3.4 Electrical Parts
3.4.1 Replacement of the Main PCB Assy
4 Adjustment Items
4.1 Operation Matrix
4.1.1 Matrix of Operations and Adjustments
4.2 Adjustment Function
4.2.1 [HEAD ADJUST] SLANT ADJUST
4.2.2 [HEAD ADJUST] DROP.POS
ADJUST
4.2.3 EDGE ADJUST
4.2.4 MEDIA COMP.2
4.2.5 CAPPING
4.2.6 HEAD ID
4.2.7 HEAD WASH
4.2.8 500mm SQUARE
4.2.9 PEN PRESSURE
4.2.10 LANDING
4.2.11 [PHOTO SENSOR] SENSOR LV.
4.2.12 [PHOTO SENSOR] POSITION
4.2.13 GR/PR POSITION
4.2.14 MOTOR CURRENT
Rev.
4.2.15 PRINT/CUT POS.
4.2.16 SERIAL No.
4.2.17 DEALER No.
4.2.18 DEFAULT SET
4.2.19 REPLACE PARTS
4.3 Mechanical Adjustment
4.3.1 Adjusting the Location of Mark Sensor
4.3.2 Adjustment of the Mounting Location
for the Cutter
4.3.3 Adjustment of the Station Height
4.3.4 Adjustment of the Wiper Height
4.3.5 Positioning of the Encoder Sensor
4.3.6 Centering of the Roll Holder
4.3.7 Positioning of the Wiper Drive Link
5 Test Items
5.1 Test Function
5.1.1 [CHECK PATTERN] PATTERN
5.1.2 [CHECK PATTERN] COLOR
CHART
5.1.3 [CHECK PATTERN] DROP.POS
CHK
5.1.4 ALL PATTERN
5.1.5 [MOTOR TEST] X SERVO MOTOR
5.1.6 [MOTOR TEST] Y SERVO MOTOR
5.1.7 [MOTOR TEST] XY SERVO
MOTOR
5.1.8 [MOTOR TEST] WIPER MOTOR
5.1.9 [MOTOR TEST] PUMP MOTOR
5.1.10 [MOTOR TEST] TAKE-UP MOTOR
5.1.11 [HEATER TEST] TEMPERATURE
5.1.12 [HEATER TEST] SSR
5.1.13 ACTION TEST
5.1.14 SENSOR TEST
5.1.15 OPTION
5.1.16 KEYBOARD LED
5.1.17 KEYBOARD TEST
5.1.18 LCD TEST
5.1.19 TIMER CHECK
5.1.20 MEMORY CHECK
5.1.21 SKEW CHECK
5.1.22 [TEMP.CHECK] HEAD TEMP.
5.1.23 [TEMP.CHECK] NOZZLE TEMP.
5.1.24 [TEMP.CHECK] HEAT SINK TEMP.
5.1.25 [TEMP.CHECK] SLIDER TEMP.
5.1.26 LINEAR ENCODER
5.1.27 [INK CARTRIDGE] PACK&END
SENSOR
5.1.28 [INK CARTRIDGE] CARTRIDGE
VALVE
5.1.29 [INK CARTRIDGE] INK-IC CHECK
5.1.30 [INK CARTRIDGE] CARTRIDGE
LED
5.1.31 [WASH CARTRIDGE] PACK&END
SENSOR
5.1.32 [WASH CARTRIDGE] CARTRIDGE
VALVE
5.1.33 [WASH CARTRIDGE] IC CHECK
5.1.34 HEAD JOINT
5.1.35 PINCH ROLLER
5.1.36 [CUT PATTERN] TEST
5.1.37 [CUT PATTERN] 2m
5.1.39 [CUT PATTERN] QUALITY
5.1.40 [CUT PATTERN] SQUARE
5.2 Other Test
5.2.1 Determining COM short circuit
5.2.2 Checking Damage of the Print Heads
5.2.3 Checking Damage of the Main PCB
ASSY
5.2.4 Checking Damage of the Ink Slider
PCB
5.2.5 Checking Conduction of HDC FFC
COM Line
5.2.6 Checking Conduction of HDC FFC
Data Line
6 Disassembly and Reassembly
6.1 Covers
6.1.1 Cover Layout
6.2 Ink-related Parts
6.2.1 Cleaning the inside of Head Unit
6.2.2 Removing of Head Unit
6.2.3 Mounting of Head Unit
6.2.4 Pump Motor
6.2.5 Pump Assy
6.2.6 Cap Assy
6.2.7 Cap Head Assy
6.2.8 Valve Assy
6.2.9 Changing Joint
6.3 Cut Head Carriage
6.3.1 Pen Assy and LED Pointer
6.3.2 Auto Cutter Assy
6.3.3 Mark Assy
6.4 Drive System
6.4.1 X-axis Motor
6.4.2 Y-axis Motor
6.4.3 Y Drive Pulley
6.4.4 Y Drive Belt
6.4.5 Linear Encoder Scale
6.4.6 Wiper Unit
6.4.7 GR Roller Assy
6.4.8 Take-up Motor
6.4.9 C Connecting Hook
6.4.10 P Head Connecting Hook
6.4.11 Clamp Assy
6.5 Electrical Parts
Rev.
6.5.2 Main PCB Assy
6.5.3 PRAM PCB Assy
6.5.5 LED PCB Assy
6.5.7 Paper Sensor
6.5.12 Encoder PCB Assy
6.5.13 Fan Motor
6.5.14 Take-up Motor PCB Assy
6.5.15 ID Contact PCB Assy
6.5.16 Detector Assy, I/C, Y
6.5.17 Replacement procedure for fuse of the
Main PCB
6.6 Sensors
6.6.1 Sensor Layout
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Details on Errors and Malfunctions
7.1.1 Concerning Errors and Malfunctions
7.1.2 List of Error Messages
7.1.3 List of Warning Messages
7.1.4 Trouble with No Messages
7.2 Detailed Methods of Coping with the
Malfunctions
7.2.1 Y Drive Belt Noise
7.2.2 Media Attachment to the Platen
7.2.3 Electrical Troubleshooting
7.2.4 Y Drive Belt Damage
7.2.5 Heater temperature does not going up
7.3 Checksheet
7.3.1 PCB Damage Checksheet
8 Operation Flow
8.1 Basic Operation
8.1.1 Start
8.1.3 Media Detection
8.2 Print Mode
8.2.1 LOCAL / REMOTE
8.2.2 SETUP
8.2.3 MAINTENANCE
8.2.4 MACHINE SETUP
8.3 Cut Mode
8.3.2 SETUP
8.3.3 MAINTENANCE / No. COPIES
8.4 Common Setting
8.4.1 COMMON SETUP
8.5 Service Mode
8.5.1 #ADJUST
8.5.2 #TEST
8.5.3 #PARAMETER
2009 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation
1. Operating Principle
1.1
Basic Operation
1.2
Maintenance Function
1.3
Ink System
1.4
Print & Cut
2009 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.1.1 P.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Main Switch Power ON
1.1
Rev.
1.1.1 Main Switch Power ON
Indication on LCD
Processing sequence
Step Processing Description
Indication
on LCD
1 Initial setting of CPU and H/W
2 Display at main switch power ON 1. [Boot] is displayed.

3 SD-RAM check 1. Check the read / write of SD-RAM
In the malfunction, [ERROR02 MAIN RAM] is displayed and the
system goes down.
4 F-ROM check 1. Check the hash value of F-ROM.
In the malfunction of boot system area, [ERROR01 MAIN ROM] is
displayed and the system goes down.
In the malfunction of the main system area, F/W update mode starts.
5 Voltage check 1. Check the power supply voltage on the main PCB assy.
In the malfunction, [ERROR03 POWER **V] is displayed and the
system goes down.
6 FPGA setting 1. Execute the configuration of PDC and HDC.
In the malfunction, [ERROR09 FPGA ERROR] is displayed and the
system goes down.
When the fuse F13 of the main PCB assy is blown, the system shuts
down, displaying [EEROR25 47V HEAD VOLTAGE].
7 Printer configuration
7-1 Checks on the HDC
connection
1. Check the configuration results about HDC.
HDC connection has not been completed, [ERROR09 HDC ERROR]
is displayed and the system goes down.
7-2 Checks on the print head
connection
1. Check the connection status of the print head 47V.
In the malfunction, [ERROR07 HEAD] or [ERROR07 VOLTAGE] is
displayed and the system goes down.
7-3 Checks on the print head
memory
1. Check the contents of the memory PCB assy of the print head.
In the malfunction, [ERROR200 HEAD MEMORY] is displayed and
the system goes down.
7-4 Checks on PRAM 1. Check the PRAM size. 128 MB is needed as its size.
If the size is zero, [ERROR203 SDRAM SIZE] is displayed and the
system goes down.
8 Version information display 1. Machine model name and main body firmware version are displayed.
2. Revision and PDC/HDC version are also displayed during the
service mode.
3. Special key function is workable during the version information is
being displayed.
9 Parameter check 1. During the initial start-up process after the upgrading of the F/W version,
initialize the following parameters.
MAINTE
INKSYSTEM
INKinfor.
INKSEQUENCE
INKTYPE
SERVO
TEST
Cut FIX Parameter
2. Carry out the check sum of the parameter region.
In the malfunction, [ERROR04 F-ROM] is displayed and the system
goes down.
10 Initial operation of the printer 1. Refer to "1.1.3 Initial Machine Operation" .
Display at main switch power ON
BOOT
Version information display
CJV30-100 V1.00
(during the service mode)
CJV30-100 V1.00.0
P.1.0.H.1.0
P: PDC, H: HDC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Sub Switch Power ON
1.1
Rev.
1.1.2 Sub Switch Power ON
Indication on LCD
Processing sequence
Indication
on LCD
1 Initial setting of CPU and H/W
2 Display at sub switch power ON 1. [PLEASE WAIT] is displayed.

3 Voltage check 1. Check the power supply voltage on the main PCB assy.
In the malfunction, [ERROR03 POWER **V] is displayed and the
system goes down.
4 FPGA setting 1. Execute the configuration of PDC and HDC.
In the malfunction, [ERROR09 FPGA ERROR] is displayed and
When the fuse F13 of the main PCB assy is blown, the system shuts
down, displaying [EEROR25 47V HEAD VOLTAGE].
5 Version information display 1. Machine model name and main body firmware version are displayed.
2. Revision and PDC/HDC version are also displayed during the
service mode.
3. Special key function is workable during the version information is
being displayed. (Except firmware update)
6 Initial operation of the printer 1. Refer to "1.1.3 Initial Machine Operation" .

Display at sub switch power ON
PLEASE WAIT
CJV30-100 V1.00
(during the service mode)
CJV30-100 V1.00.0
P.1.0.H.1.0
P: PDC, H: HDC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Initial Machine Operation
1.1
Rev.
1.1.3 Initial Machine Operation
Indication on LCD
Processing sequence
Indication
on LCD
1 Detection of a station origin 1. Drive the wiper motor to detect the station origin.
When it cannot be detected, [ERROR46 WIPER] is displayed and
If an error occurs during the service mode, try the operation again
by pressing the key [ENTER]. Pressing the key [FUNCTION] is
also workable.
2 Detection of the Y origin. 1. Drive the Y-axis motor to detect the Y origin.
When it cannot be detected, [ERROR51 Y-ORIGIN] is displayed
and the system goes down.
3 Capping 1. Move the head carriage back to the Y origin and carry out capping.
4 Correcting the Y-axis distance
(Only when MAIN power is on)
1. Make the print head carriage go and return one time by a platen width,
correct the Y-axis distance, and conduct the linear encoder test.
In the malfunction, [ERROR08 LinearENCODER] is displayed and
5 Stand by of cut head Move the cut head to the maintenance position at the left of the unit
and check the coupling of the cut head.
(Refer to 1.1.6 Operation for Connecting the Heads)
A display at the start of the operation
PLEASE WAIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Detection of a Media Width
1.1
Rev.
1.1.4 Detection of a Media Width
Indication on LCD
Processing sequence
Indication
on LCD
1 Connection of the cut head 1. Refer to "1.1.6 Operation for Connecting the Heads" .

2 Media right end detection 1. After moving the cut head carriage to the position of the first pinch
roller, use the pinch roller detection sensor to detect the right edge of
media.
When detection is impossible or the number of pinch rollers is not
recognized, the display shows [ERROR50 MEDIA DETECT].
Raise the lever to cancel the error.
3 Clamp pressure switching 1. Refer to "1.1.5 Clamp Pressure Switching" .
4 Media left end detection 1. Move the cut head carriage left and use the pinch roller detection
sensor to detect the right edge of media.
When detection is impossible or the number of pinch rollers is not
recognized, the display shows [ERROR50 MEDIA DETECT].
Raise the lever to cancel the error.
5 Stand by of head carriage 1. Move the head carriage to the standby position of the cut head.
The operation for detecting a media width will be discontinued, if the clamp lever is placed on the UP position
during the operation. (Only during Step 3 above)
A display during the print
media detection
DETECTING MEDIA NOW
PLEASE WAIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Clamp Pressure Switching
1.1
Rev.
1.1.5 Clamp Pressure Switching
Indication on LCD
Processing sequence
Indication
on LCD
1 Connection of the cut head 1. Refer to "1.1.6 Operation for Connecting the Heads" .

2 Clamp pressure switching 1. The head carriage moves from the right end to the left end.
2. While moving the head carriage, check the position of the pinch roller
with the PR sensor.
In the malfunction, [ERROR181 PR POSITION] is displayed and
3. Change over the clamp pressure using the solenoid.
4. By repeating the operations described above, change over the clamp
pressure of all the pinch rollers positioned from the right to the left.
3 Stand by of head carriage 1. Move the head carriage to the standby position of the cut head.
Switch the clamp pressure before printing under the following conditions:
The machine draws a stored pattern which can be selected by the user for printing or cutting.
The clamp pressure switching command was received by output software.
Display during media detection
DETECTING MEDIA NOW
PLEASE WAIT
Display before printing
PLEASE WAIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Operation for Connecting the Heads
Model CJV30/TPC Issued 2008.08.04 Revised F/W ver. 1.00 Remark
1.0
Rev.
1.1.6 Operation for Connecting the Heads
Processing sequence
Separation of the cut head Connection of the print head
Separation of the print head Connection of the cut head
1 Separate the cut head. 1. After moving the cut head carriage to the left end and turning on the clamp solenoid, check
the position of the cut head by the cut head connection sensor.
In the malfunction, [ERROR170 CUTTER LOCK] is displayed.
2. After checking the position, turn off the clamp solenoid and lock up the cut head.
3. Move the head connecting unit to the right and separate the cut head.
2 Connection of the print head 1. Move the head connecting unit to the right end.
2. After checking a Y origin, connect the print head to the cut head.
In the malfunction, [ERROR170 CUTTER LOCK] is displayed.
3. Turn on the print head solenoid and unlock the print head.
4. Detect a Y origin again and cap the print head.
5. Turn off the print head solenoid and lock up the print head.
When starting to plot, turn on the print head solenoid and unlock the print head, then
move the print head.
1 Separate the print head. 1. After turning on the print head solenoid, move the print head carriage and check a Y origin.
In the malfunction, [ERROR170 PRINT HEAD LOCK] is displayed and the system
goes down.
2. After checking the Y origin, move the print head back to the capping position and carry
out capping.
3. Turn off the print head solenoid and lock up the print head.
4. Move the head connecting unit to the left and separate the print head.
2 Connection of the cut head 1. Move the head connecting unit to the left end.
2. Connect the cut head to the head connecting unit and after turning on the clamp solenoid,
check the position of the cut head by the cut head connection sensor.
In the malfunction, [ERROR170 PRINT HEAD LOCK] is displayed and the system
goes down.
3. Detect a Y origin again and cap the print head.
4. Move the head connecting unit back to the standby position of the cut head carriage and
turn off the clamp solenoid, then lock up the cut head.
When starting the cutting operation, turn on the clamp solenoid and unlock the cut
head, and then move the cut head.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Mark Detection
1.0
Rev.
Mark shape
The procedure described below is for 4-point mark detection that is performed after media detection.
At 4-point mark detection, the registration marks will be detected in the following order:
TP1 (Vertical Horizontal) TP3 (Vertical Horizontal) TP4 (Vertical Horizontal)
TP2 (Vertical Horizontal)
Processing sequence ?1/ 3?
1 The plotter enters mark
detection mode
1. If mark detection is set to any other than OFF in the [CUT MODE] -> [SETUP] ->
[MARK DETECT] procedure, the light pointer turns on after media detection and the
system moves to the mark detection mode.
2 Move the light spot of the
light pointer into the mark
detection start area
1. By operating JOG keys, move the light spot of the light pointer into the mark detection
start area and then press the [ENTER] key.
3 Photo sensor moves to the
light spot position
1. The mark sensor moves to the light spot position by the cut head carriage and media feed
operation.
4 Searching for vertical line
of mark (TP1)
1. The head moves in the Y-axis left direction (for type 1) or Y-axis right
direction (for type 2) until the mark sensor turns on and stops.
2. The head moves in the Y-axis left direction (for type 1) or Y-axis right
direction (for type 2) by the distance of HM.
3. The head moves in the Y-axis right direction (for type 1) or Y-axis left
4. The plotter determines the center of the vertical line based on the positions
of 1 and 3.
5. Finally the head moves in the Y-axis right direction (for type 1) or Y-axis left direction (for
type 2) by the distance of HM and terminates.
Type 1 (external mark) Type 2 (internal mark)
X-axis upper
direction
Y-axis right
direction
Type 1 (external mark)
Mark detection start area
Type 2 (internal mark)
Mark detection start area
HM=a/2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 Searching for horizontal
line of mark (TP1)
1. The head moves in the X-axis upper direction (for type 1) or X-axis lower
2. The head moves in the X-axis upper direction (for type 1) or X-axis lower
direction (for type 2) by the distance of HM.
3. The head moves in the X-axis lower direction (for type 1) or X-axis upper
4. The plotter determines the center of the horizontal line based on the
positions of 1 and 3.
5. Finally the head moves in the X-axis upper direction by the distance of HM and terminates.
of mark (TP3)
1. When the distances between the marks are known by the procedure for scale compensation
with the setting value BEFORE, the head moves in the X-axis upper direction by
Distance between marks -Length which is twice the mark size.
2. The head moves in the Y-axis left direction until the mark sensor turns on and stops.
3. The head moves in the Y-axis left direction by the distance of HM.
4. The head moves in the Y-axis right direction until the mark sensor turns on and stops.
5. The plotter determines the center of the vertical line based on the positions of 2 and 4.
6. Finally the head moves in the Y-axis left direction (for type 1) or Y-axis right direction (for
If the vertical line is not detected even after a search of the maximum printing range,
[ERROR36-C MARK DETECT] appears.
line of mark (TP3)
1. The head moves in the X-axis upper direction (for type 1) or X-axis lower direction (for
type 2) until the mark sensor turns on and stops.
type 2) by the distance of HM.
3. The head moves in the X-axis lower direction (for type 1) or X-axis upper direction (for
5. Finally the head moves upward by HM of the horizontal line of TP3 and to the left (for type
1) or to the right (for type 2) by HM of the vertical line.
If the horizontal line cannot be detected, the plotter determines that the vertical line
detected above is not part of a mark and repeats the procedure from Step 6.
line of mark (TP4)
1. When the distances between the marks are known by the procedure for scale compensation
with the setting value BEFORE, the head moves in the X-axis upper direction by
Distance between marks -Length which is twice the mark size.
2. The head moves in the X-axis upper direction until the mark sensor turns on and stops.
3. The head moves in the X-axis upper direction by the distance of HM.
4. The head moves in the X-axis lower direction until the mark sensor turns on and stops.
5. The plotter determines the center of the horizontal line based on the positions of 2 and 4.
6. Finally the head moves in the X-axis upper direction (for type 1) or X-axis lower direction
(for type 2) by the distance of HM and terminates.
If the horizontal line is not found even after a search of a range up to 5 m, [ERROR36-C
MARK DETECT] appears.
If no media is detected at the tail end detection position during a search for a
horizontal line, the plotter performs the tail end detection of the media first and then
continues horizontal line detection.
of mark (TP4)
1. The head moves in the Y-axis right direction (for type 1) or Y-axis left direction (for type 2)
until the mark sensor turns on and stops.
2. The head moves in the Y-axis right direction (for type 1) or Y-axis left direction (for type 2)
by the distance of HM.
3. The head moves in the Y-axis left direction (for type 1) or Y-axis right direction (for type 2)
until the mark sensor turns on and stops.
5. Finally the head moves in the Y-axis right direction by the distance of HM and terminates.
HM=a/2
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
of mark (TP2)
1. When the distances between the marks are known by the procedure for
scale compensation with the setting value BEFORE, the head moves in
the Y-axis right direction by Distance between marks -Length which is
twice the mark size.
2. The head moves in the Y-axis right direction until the mark sensor turns on
and stops.
3. The head moves in the Y-axis right direction by the distance of HM.
4. The head moves in the Y-axis left direction until the mark sensor turns on and stops.
6. Finally the head moves in the Y-axis right direction (for type 1) or Y-axis left direction (for
If the vertical line is not detected even after a search of the maximum printing range,
[ERROR36-C MARK DETECT] appears.
line of mark (TP2)
type 2) by the distance of HM.
5. At the end of mark detection, the pen tip moves to the corner of TP1, which is the center of
the vertical line and the center of the horizontal line of TP1.
If the horizontal line cannot be detected, the plotter determines that the vertical line
detected above is not part of a mark and repeats the procedure from Step 10.
12 The plotter completes
registration mark
detection
1. The corner of TP1 works as the origin from here on.
HM=a/2
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Main Switch Power OFF
1.1
Rev.
1.1.8 Main Switch Power OFF
Indication on LCD
Processing sequence
Processing during sub-power OFF
Processing during main-power OFF
Indication
on LCD
1 Hardware resources OFF 1. Turn off the heater, dry fan, exhaust fan, and vacuum fan.
2. Turn off the output of the COM waveform.

2 Stand by head connecting unit 1. Move the head connecting unit to the print head for connecting.
3 Turning off solenoids 1. Turn off the Print head solenoid, clamp solenoid, and cartridge valve
solenoid.
4 Saving parameters 1. Save parameter values of system parameter, running parameter, etc.
2. Update head ID and Print head memory.
5 Setting up sleeve start-up time 1. Set the start-up time of operations executed during sub-power OFF
such as sleeve refresh, pump tube cleaning, and cleaning.
6 Motor OFF 1. Turn off servo and drive motor power.
7 Sub-power LED blinking 1. Indicates sub-power off by sub-power LED blinking.
8 Power OFF
1 Saving parameters 1. Save the running parameter values.
In service mode, the buzzer sounds when the parameter values have been stored successfully.
Turn off sub-power to implement the sleeve operation for the prevention of the clogged ink during
power OFF.
When turning off main power, turn off sub-power first and then main power.
Display at sub switch power OFF
PLEASE WAIT
POWER OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function
1.1
Basic Operation
1.2
1.3
Ink System
1.4
Print & Cut
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > CARRIAGE OUT
1.0
Rev.
1.2.1 CARRIAGE OUT
Indication on LCD
Processing sequence
Indication
on LCD
1 Start 1. Taking the cap off
2. After moving the print head carriage to the maintenance location, the wiper
moves to the wiping location and the servo motor is turned off.
2 Maintenance 1. The unit does not operate during maintenance.
2. Waiting for the end of maintenance is displayed. It is terminated by [ENTER].

3 End 1. After the wiper moves to its origin, move the print head carriage, then perform
the initial machine operation.
See "1.1.3 Initial Machine Operation" .
Out of Service mode, a warning beep sounds at an interval of 30 seconds during carriage out operation to
prevent the nozzle surface and the inside of the cap from getting dry.
Display during maintenance
ST.MAINTENANCE
COMPLETED :ent
Display during initial operation
PLEASE WAIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > WIPER REPLACE
1.0
Rev.
1.2.2 WIPER REPLACE
Indication on LCD
Processing sequence
Indication
on LCD

3 End 1. After the wiper moves to its origin, move the print head carriage, then perform
the initial machine operation.
See "1.1.3 Initial Machine Operation".
After completion of this operation, clear the executed wiping count, one of the running parameters.
Out of Service mode, a warning beep sounds at an interval of 30 seconds during carriage out operation
to prevent the nozzle surface and the inside of the cap from getting dry.
ST.MAINTENANCE
COMPLETED :ent
PLEASE WAIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > NOZZLE WASH
1.1
Rev.
1.2.3 NOZZLE WASH
Indication on LCD
Processing sequence
Indication
on LCD
1 Start 1. Taking the cap off.
3. Locking the pump tube.
2 Maintenance (Wiper) 1. The unit does not operate during maintenance.
2. Waiting for the end of maintenance is displayed. (Waiting for [ENTER] input)

3 Maintenance
(Nozzle wash)
1. Turning the wiper off
2. Lock the pump tube and display the message. (Waiting for [ENTER] input)
3. Input the waiting time. (Waiting for [ENTER] input)
Setting value: 1 - 99 min. (unit: 1 min.)
4. After moving the print head carriage and performing Initial machine operation
(1.1.3), wait for the set time to elapse.
Press [FUNCTION], and the maintenance washing liquid will be injected into
the cap.
4 End 1. Executing cleaning

2. End
WIPER CLEANING
COMPLETED(NEXT) :ent
Fill the liqid.
ST.MAINTENANCE
LEAVING TIME : 1min
PLEASE WAIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > PUMP TUBE WASH
1.0
Rev.
1.2.4 PUMP TUBE WASH
Indication on LCD
Processing sequence
Indication
on LCD
2 Maintenance
(Pump tube wash)
1. Repeat the following operations until depressing [ENTER] key.
Locking the pump tube
No action for 10 seconds
Dry suction for 5 seconds
2. Maintenance washing liquid is poured into the cap by depressing the
[FUNCTION] key.
3 End 1. Dry suction for 20 seconds

2. Initial Machine Operation (1.1.3)

ST.MAINTENANCE
COMPLETED :ent
PLEASE WAIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > CR.MAINTENANCE
1.0
Rev.
1.2.5 CR.MAINTENANCE
Indication on LCD
Processing sequence
Indication
on LCD

3 End 1. After moving the print head carriage, perform initial machine operation.
See "1.1.3 Initial Machine Operation" .

CR.MAINTENANCE
CARRIAGE OUT :ent
CR.MAINTENANCE
COMPLETED :ent
PLEASE WAIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > FILL UP INK
1.0
Rev.
1.2.6 FILL UP INK
Indication on LCD
Processing sequence
Indication
on LCD
1 Start 1. When a waste ink tank warning occurs, the warning message is displayed.
For details, see "1.2.9 Waste Ink Tank Warning".
2 Filling 1. Opening the cartridge valve and starting the ink suction motor.
2. The filling operation is to be discontinued if a warning about the ink cartridge
is detected.
3. The cartridge with less amount of remaining ink is used first.
(Only for the 4-color ink set)
3 End 1. Stopping the pump motor

HD.MAINTENANCE
FILL UP INK :ent
FILLING UP
00:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > DISCHARGE&WASH
1.0
Rev.
1.2.7 DISCHARGE&WASH
Indication on LCD
Processing sequence
Indication
on LCD
1 Ink discharging 1. Remove the ink cartridges (from all the slots).
(*Monitored with cartridge sensors)
2. Open the cartridge valve and drive the ink suction pump motor to discharge ink.
3. When a waste ink tank warning occurs, the warning message is displayed.
2 Cleaning 1. Insert washing liquid cartridges (into all the slots).

2. Cleaning the inside of the tubes
Opening the cartridge valve and starting the ink suction pump motor
When a waste ink tank warning occurs, the warning message is displayed.
(For details, see "1.2.9 Waste Ink Tank Warning".)
3. Performing head vibration operation (starting the Y-axis motor)
3 Discharging of washing
liquid
1. Remove the washing liquid cartridges (from all the slots).
2. Open the cartridge valve and drive the ink suction pump motor to discharge
washing liquid.
3. When a waste ink tank warning occurs, the warning message is displayed.
4 Repeating 1. Executing 2 to 3 again.

5 Operation selection 1. Select processing as below.
[] Re-WASH : No. 3 4 are executed again
[] END : to next step.
6 Whether to discharge
maintenance washing
liquid
1. Select processing as below.
[] DISCHARGE : to next step.
[] END : to Step 9 (End)
7 Maintenance washing
liquid discharge
1. Discharge maintenance washing liquid.
For details, see "1.2.8 Maintenance Washing Liquid Filling and Discharge".

8 End 1. (Once the ink discharge operation of this cleaning function is executed, the
heads will be empty of ink.)
The washing liquid cartridge does not incorporate an IC chip.
Therefore, IC chip read error is recognized to be normal.
Remove:InkCartridges
MMCCYYKK
- DISCHARGE -
00:00
Set:WashingCartridges
12345678
- ABSORPTION -
00:00
Remove:Cartridges
12345678
SELECT:
END< >Re-WASH
Maint.WashLiquid
END < >DISCHARGE
Remove:Maint.Wash
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Maintenance Washing Liquid Filling and Discharge
1.0
Rev.
1.2.8 Maintenance Washing Liquid Filling and Discharge
Indication on LCD
Washing liquid filling sequence
Washing liquid discharge sequence
Indication
on LCD
1 Start 1. Insert washing liquid cartridges.
Filling will not be executed if a warning about the washing liquid cartridge is
displayed. (Monitored with washing liquid cartridge sensors)
2 Filling 1. Run the pump.

2. Opening the cartridge valve.
(until washing liquid fills the wiper cleaning valve)
3. Close the cartridge valve.
4. Stoppping the pump

Indication
on LCD
1 Start 1. Remove the washing liquid cartridges from the printer.
2 Discharge 1. Run the pump.

2. Opening the cartridge valve.
(until washing liquid fills the wiper cleaning valve)
3. Close the cartridge valve.
4. Stoppping the pump.

MaintWashLiquid
FILLING UP START :ent
MaintWashLiquid
CARTRIDGE : none
MaintWashLiquid
There is a CARTRIDGE
MaintWashLiquid
DISCHARGE START :ent
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Waste Ink Tank Warning
1.1
Rev.
1.2.9 Waste Ink Tank Warning
Indication on LCD
Outline
The counter in the machine monitors the amount of discharged ink. Depending on the status, the message is displayed
on LCD to urge you to replace the waste ink tank before operations involving suction (cleaning, filling, and discharge).
Explanation of situation
No. Status Description
Indication
on LCD
1 [!WASTE TANK] is
displayed locally.
1. Is displayed when the counter in the machine reaches full or more.
2. When it is displayed, sleep and routine operations (REFRESH, PUMP TUBE
WASH, CLEANING) are not performed.
3. When you cancel the warning message, be sure to replace the waste ink tank
before executing [MAINTENANCE] -> [InkTankReplace].
4. The operation in 3 clears the counter in the machine.
2 Waste ink tank reaches near

full.
1. If you select Continue, the present operation is continued. The warning
message is displayed again during the next suction operation.
2. If REPLACE is selected, the present operation is continued. The counter
value in the firmware is cleared.
3 Waste ink tank reaches full. 1. Replace the waste ink tank or dispose of ink.
2. The present operation is continued by depressing [ENTER] key.
The counter value the machine is cleared.
If you select REPLACE in the operation as above when the waste ink tank is near full or full, be sure
to replace the waste ink tank or dispose of ink.
If you continue to use the waste ink tank without replacing it, the waste ink may overflow before the
confirmation message is displayed.
The waste ink discharged when [NOZZLE WASH], [PUMP TUBE WASH] or [COSTODY WASH]
of [ST.MAINTENANCE] is performed is not cumulatively counted in this unit.
Before and after these operations, be sure to check the status of the waste ink tank.
Warning display in local mode
<LOCAL. 1> [#01]
!WASTE TANK
Display when near full is reached
Confirm a waste tank
Continue< >Exchange
Display when full is reached
Confirm a waste tank
Exchange :ent
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Aqua->Sol EXCHG.
1.0
Rev.
1.2.10 Aqua->Sol EXCHG.
Functional Overview
The function is to replace aqueous pigmented ink with solvent ink on same machine.
Maintenance Open Mode is selectable while filling up aqueous pigmented ink
Menu :> FUNCTION>Maintenance>Aqua->Sol EXCHG.
Processing Sequence
DISCHARGE & WASH + Initial Filling performs when starting-up
Solvent ink becomes selectable with Initial Filling in this function.
Requisite for this function
Head cleaning cartridge (cleaning cartridge for aqueous pigmented ink) SPC-188S
Solvent ink filling cartridge SPC-0475
If normal Discharge &Wash is performed while using aqueous pigmented ink,solvent ink is not
selectable when initial ink filling.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System
1.1
Basic Operation
1.2
1.3
Ink System
1.4
Print & Cut
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Configuration
1.2
Rev.
1.3.1 Configuration
Ink Supply Path Diagrammatic Illustration
When TPC is used, put Bl on C, and put Lbl on Lc below.
When filling 4-color ink set
When filling 6-color ink set
When filling 6-color+white ink set (SS21 only)
Ink cartridge slot
Ink switching valve
Ink bridge
Print head
Ink cartridge slot
Ink switching valve
Print head
Ink cartridge slot
Ink switching valve
Print head
1.3.1 Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Flow of the ink supply control
No. Item Description
1 Monitoring of cartridge error Monitors a cartridge error when ink is supplied.
For details, see "1.3.2 Ink System Error Monitoring".
2 Control and selection of supply
cartridge
Checks the status of the ink cartridge and selects the cartridge (for the 4-color ink set).
For details, see "1.3.3 Supply Cartridge Control and Selection"
3 Updating of cartridge LED status Updates the LED status depending on the status of ink supply and errors.
For details, see"1.3.4 Cartridge LED Control"
4 Open/close supply valves Open/close the ink supply valves depending on the control and selection of the ink
supply cartridge.
For details, see "1.3.5 Supply Valve Control"
When filling 7-color ink set (Eco-PA1 only)
When filling 8-color ink set (ES3 only)
Ink cartridge slot
Ink switching valve
Ink bridge
Print head
Ink cartridge slot
Ink switching valve
Print head
R.1.1
1.1
Rev.
1.3.1 Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ink system configuration
1 When filling 4-color ink set Two paths of the same color are linked shortly after the cartridge valves.
Normally the valve of 1 cartridge per color is opened by toggle switching, supplying ink to
a 2-nozzle row.
Thereafter, the cartridge on the side with the open valve is referred to as the control
cartridge, while the other is referred to as the sub cartridge.
Longer consecutive drawing time than conventional products and replacement of
cartridges during the drawing are allowed by toggle switching of 2 cartridges for 1 supply
path.
2 When filling any ink set
other than 4- color ink set
(6-color ink set, 6-color +
white ink set, 7-color ink set,
8-color ink set)
1 cartridge is connected to a 1-nozzle row. No toggle is switched and all cartridges are
control cartridges.
Since 1 cartridge is assigned to 1 path, it cannot be replaced during printing.
3 Ink supply system The ink filling method of CJV30 uses a suction system with a roller pump, and a pressure
damper with a self-sealing valve.
Ink is supplied with a siphon during printing.
The damper sealing valve opens to supply ink when the discharge pressure drops, and the
sealing valve closes when the damper ink chamber is filled.
The sealing valve reduces the ink path pressure that reaches the head meniscus during the
carriage motion.
4 Replacing ink cartridge The warning message is displayed if the cartridge is not installed even after a lapse of 10
minutes to prevent the supply system from getting dry.
5 Ink supply valve For each cartridge, a supply valve is provided to supply ink by opening it.
The supply valve is normally closed and is opened only when ink supply is required.
Ink supply is executed during discharge operation (for printing or flushing) and suction
operation (for cleaning or filling). The supply valve for any cartridge that has developed
an error does not open, thus does not allow ink supply.
6 Ink cartridge LED For each cartridge, two LEDs (green: control LED; red: error LED) are used to allow the
user to visually check the cartridge state.
Since all 8 cartridges are control cartridges except when 4-color ink set is used, the green
LED is on for cartridges where there is no error.
7 Ink use-up cleaning
For cleaning, the printer switches the supply valve to the cartridge that has displayed [INK
NEAR END] or [INK END] to use the cartridge with the smaller amount of residual ink
first. For details, see "1.3.7 Use-up Cleaning".
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Ink System Error Monitoring
1.2
Rev.
Monitoring of cartridge error
Monitoring of ink system error
The ink system are checked for any error periodically (every 30 ms), and printer operation is limited according to the
error, if detected. The table below shows the possible errors and the limitations on printer operation.
*1 Ink IC: NON-ORIGINAL INK, WRONG INK IC, Kind of INK, Color of INK, WRONG CARTRIDGE,
Expiration:2MONTH
*2 : Executable X: Inexecutable
1 Cartridge error check A cartridge error is periodically checked (every 30 ms).
Select the supply cartridge in taking into account the error status and the amount of remaining ink.
2 LED control when an
error occurs
The green LED lights up to indicate that the supply cartridge is now being controlled.
The red LED lights up or blinks to indicate that the cartridge must or should be replaced.
3 Supply valve control
when an error occurs
The valve for the cartridge where the green LED is lit opens when the instruction to open the
valve is issued.
When an error occurs in a supply cartridge while the valve is open (during printing or cleaning),
the valve switches to the other cartridge which can supply ink, if any, to continue printer
operation. If a supply cartridge is removed, printing or cleaning will be stopped and the printer
will return to LOCAL mode.
Since all 8 cartridges are control cartridges except when the 4-color ink set is used, printing or cleaning
is stopped when an error occurs and the printer returns to LOCAL mode.
P
r
i
o
r
i
t
y
Ink system error
Execution status when an
error occurs*
2
Description of the error
CL/
filling
Printing
Head
cleaning
Pump
cleaning
1 Initial filling is not executed X X X X Initial filling has not been executed.
2 INK END error
X X
Errors occurred in both cartridges and printing & suction
operation can not be executed.
3 INK NEAR END error
X
Waste ink tank is almost full.
Printer returns to LOCAL mode every completion of
printing one file.
4 Waste Ink Tank
X X X X
When the amount of waste ink counted by the waste tank
firmware increases to a certain amount after it displays
near full.
5 NO CARTRIDGE X X X X No cartridge has been installed.
6
Ink IC *
1
X X X X
An error related to the cartridge IC has occurred.
Ink supply is impossible.
7 INK REMAIN ZERO
X X X
Ink in the cartridge is used up.
Ink supply is impossible.
8 Cartridge ink end
X X
Ink in the cartridge has been used to the end level, with
a predetermined small amount of ink remaining.
Ink supply is impossible. (CL can be used)
9 Cartridge near end

The Near End sensor has detected the nearly ink end
status.
The cartridge can be used for printing or cleaning.
10 Expiration:1 MONTH One month has passed since the expiration date of the ink.
11 Notification of nozzle
cleaning execution

Prompts the user to follow the nozzle cleaning procedure.
12 !Replace a WIPER

The wiper operation count has exceeded the number
which requires the replacement the wiper.
13 !WashLiquidCart.NONE X No washing liquid cartridge has been installed.
14 !WRONG WASH CART. X Trouble with the ink washing liquid cartridge
15 !Wash Liquid END X The washing liquid cartridge is empty.
16 Expiration Ink expiration has been reached.
17 !WASTE TANK X X X Waste ink tank is almost full. (counted by firmware)
18 REINSERT CARTRIDGE
X X X X
INK NEAR END has been detected by mistake and the
machine prompts you to reset ink cartridge.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Errors related to the amount of remaining ink
Calculate the number of ink shots by printing and flushing or the amount of ink sucked by cleaning and filling, and
then the amount of consumed ink by subtraction of remaining ink.
When the amount of remaining ink is updated, it is written into the ink IC chip.
A cartridge error is issued according to the amount of remaining ink.
No. Item
Description
Error detect timing Limitations after error detection
1 Cartridge near end The amount of remaining ink is detected on the near
end detect PCB assy. The specified value of each
cartridge is as follows:
220 cc cartridge: 20 cc
440 cc cartridge: 40 cc
Initial filling is not allowed, but
printing and cleaning are allowed.
2 Cartridge ink end Displayed when use of a certain amount of ink is
detected after the near end detection.
Neither printing none initial filling is
allowed, but cleaning is allowed.
3 INK REMAIN ZERO
Displayed when the amount of remaining ink is
detected to be 0 cc after the ink end detection.
This error may be displayed only after
completion of ink use-up cleaning.
None of printing, initial filling and
cleaning is allowed.
4 WRONG CARTRIDGE Occurs when the amount of consumed ink exceeds
nearly double (220 cc cartridge: 400 cc, 440
cartridge: 800 cc or more) the ink cartridge capacity
but the ink end is not displayed yet.
None of printing, initial filling and
cleaning is allowed.
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Ink System Error Monitoring
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Supply Cartridge Control and Selection
1.2
Rev.
1.3.3 Supply Cartridge Control and Selection
Supply cartridge control
Cartridge status indicated by LEDs
Selection and determination of the supply cartridge for the 4-color ink set
supply cartridge switching selection timing
At power-on
When an error occurs in the currently selected cartridge
When a cartridge with higher priority than the currently selected cartridge is inserted
Switching is not executed during printing or cleaning but executed when the printer has returned to LOCAL mode.
1 For the 4-color ink set The printer uses two ink cartridges for 1 supply system (1 nozzle row) and can mount 8
cartridges in total.
1 supply cartridge is assigned to 1 supply system. The cartridge with less amount of
remaining ink is used first by toggle switching.
Switching between cartridges for ink supply occurs under any of the following
conditions:
INK END during printing
INK NEAR END during filling
Ink IC warning
When the cartridge is removed
When executing Ink use-up cleaning
2 Except for the 4-color ink set
(filling 6-color, 6-color +
white, 7-color, 8-color ink
set)
Since there is 1 ink cartridge per supply system, all 8 cartridges are supply cartridges.
LED Status Explanation
Green Lit Supply cartridge
Red Blink INK END, INK NEAR END, Expiration:1MONTH
Lit NO CARTRIDGE
WRONG INK IC
Errors related to PIC, namely, NON-ORIGINAL INK, WRONG INK IC, Kind of INK,
Color of INK, WRONG CARTRIDGE and Expiration:2MONTH
INK REMAIN ZERO
A cartridge having no remaining ink after execution of ink use-up cleaning (only in 4-color use).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When there is more than one effective cartridge for 1-ink supply path
*1 with FUNCTION>MACHINE SETUP>CART. PRIORITY, the priority order of 2 and 3 is replaced.
The priority order of supply when using MBIS1 (FW Ver.2.00)
When using MBIS1 in all slots
Refer to the table above When there is more than one effective cartridge for 1-ink supply path.
When using MBIS1 and the ink cartridge as mixed loading through supply path of the same color
Use MBIS1 cartridge by priority.
If MBIS1 is expired, the ink cartridge is switched to use by prioriry.
Also, the cartridge using by priority can be switched temporarily with the operation below.
1. Press [ENTER] key on Local or Remote.
2. Press [REMOTE] key. Select or change with the JOG key.
Priority Cartridge status
1 Expired cartridge
2 The cartridge having the smaller amount of remaining ink is selected.
3 If there is no distinction at 2, the cartridge closer to the expiration date is selected.
4 If there is no distinction at 2 and 3, the cartridge in the smaller slot number is selected.
*1
Priority Cartridge status (Before V1.30)
1 The cartridge having the smaller amount of remaining ink is selected.
2 If there is no distinction at 1, the cartridge closer to the expiration date is selected.
3 If there is no distinction at 1 and 2, the cartridge in the smaller slot number is selected.
In the case of no mixed loading, the function above cannot be used.
The setting is restored by taking out the ink cartridge selected or turning off the power.
(Supplies from MBIS side.)
[REMOTE]
->
SS21INK MMCCYYKK
REMAIN 99999999
BULK/CART SELECT
- B B B<
Supplying cartridge is displayed.
- Not mixed, B MBIS, C ink cartridge
R.1.2
1.2
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When one cartridge for 1-supply path has an error
The printer selects the other cartridge if available.
The conditions for cartridge selection vary depending on the error type and ink supply timing. Ink supply is executed
during discharge operation (for printing, flushing, etc.) or during suction operation (for cleaning or filling).
The table below shows the conditions for cartridge selection.
Expiration:2MONTH
*2 : Available for ink supply. X: Not available for ink supply
: Available for ink supply when the other cartridge is normal
Availability of ink supply
Expiration:2MONTH
: Both discharge and suction are allowed. X: Neither discharge nor suction is allowed (Ink end error).
: Discharge is allowed but suction not allowed (Ink near end error).
Conditions for changing the supply cartridge
Expiration:2MONTH
: Switched : Not switched
: Switched according to priority. (No operation by the condition as above during cleaning)
No. Cartridge status Discharge operation*
2
Suction operation*
2
1 Normal cartridge
2 Cartridge near end
3 Cartridge ink end X
4 Residual quantity 0 cartridge X X
5 No cartridge X X
6
Ink IC*
1
X X
Cartridge 2
\
Cartridge 1
Normal cartridge
Cartridge near
end
Cartridge ink end
Residual quantity
0 cartridge
No cartridge
Ink IC *
1
Normal cartridge
Cartridge near end
Cartridge ink end X X X
Residual quantity 0 cartridge X X X
No cartridge X X X
Ink IC*
1
X X X
Sub cartridge
\
Control cartridge
Normal cartridge
Cartridge near
end
Cartridge ink end
Residual quantity
0 cartridge
No cartridge
Ink IC*
1
Normal cartridge
Cartridge near end
Cartridge ink end
Residual quantity 0 cartridge
No cartridge
Ink IC*
1

R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Cartridge LED Control
1.1
Rev.
1.3.4 Cartridge LED Control
Condition of each cartridge LED indicated by its lighting and blinking
The two LEDs light up or blink to indicate the condition of the cartridge and help the user determine the time for replacing
the cartridge.
Expiration:2MONTH
LED operation pattern
LED Cartridge status
Control LED
(Green)
Not lit No cartridge has been selected as the supply cartridge
Blinking
Lit A cartridge has been selected as the supply cartridge
(All cartridge LEDs are Lit for any other than the 4-color ink set except when an error occurs.)
Ink use-up cleaning is now being performed
For details, see "1.3.7 Use-up Cleaning".
Error LED (Red) Not lit The cartridge is normal
Blinking An error has occurred (Blinking signifies that one of the following errors has occurred)
Cartridge near end
Cartridge ink end
One month has passed since the expiration date of the ink
Lit An error has occurred (Lighting signifies that one of the following errors has occurred)
Residual quantity 0 cartridge
No cartridge
Ink IC*
1
REINSERT CARTRIDGE
Event
For the 4-color ink set
Except for the
4-color ink set
Cartridge 1 Cartridge 2 Cartridge 1
Control LED Error LED Control LED Error LED Control LED Error LED
Online supply start
Both cartridges free from problems
Cartridge 1 is the control cartridge.
Lit Lit
Cartridge 1
Cartridge near end
Lit Blink Lit Blink
Cartridge 1
Cartridge ink end
Blink Lit Blink
Cartridge 2
Cartridge near end
Blink Lit Blink
Cartridge 1
Removed for replacement
Lit Lit Blink Lit
Cartridge 1
A normal cartridge has been set
Lit Blink Lit
Cartridge 2
Cartridge ink end
Lit Blink
Online printing has been completed
All valves closed
Lit Blink Lit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Supply Valve Control
1.0
Rev.
1.3.5 Supply Valve Control
Cartridge switching operation
Timing to open/close the supply valve
The supply valves are usually closed and opened only when ink supply is required.
Timing to open/close the supply valves is shown below:
Event
For the 4-color ink set
Except for the
4-color ink set
Cartridge 1
valve
Cartridge 2
valve
Cartridge 1
valve
1 Online supply start
Both cartridges free from problems
OPEN CLOSE OPEN
2 Cartridge 1
Cartridge near end
No change No change No change
3 Cartridge 1
Cartridge ink end
CLOSE OPEN CLOSE
4 Cartridge 2
Cartridge near end
No change No change
5 Cartridge 1
Removed for replacement
No change No change CLOSE
6 Cartridge 1
A normal cartridge has been set
No change No change OPEN
7 Cartridge 2
Cartridge ink end
OPEN CLOSE
8 Online printing has been completed
All valves closed
CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE
Timing to open/close the supply valves
Instruction to open/
close the supply valve
Flushing Before execution OPEN
After execution CLOSE
Cleaning or filling Before execution OPEN
Head wash Before execution OPEN
Before printing operation OPEN
Before capping operation CLOSE
When changing the supply cartridge during ink supply OPEN/CLOSE
At the occurrence of an system error CLOSE
At power-off CLOSE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.3
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Monitoring of the Amount of Remaining Ink
1.3
Rev.
1.3.6 Monitoring of the Amount of Remaining Ink
Outline
The amount of remaining cartridge ink is calculated in such a way that the amount of ink consumed for the
following operations is calculated by subtraction of remaining ink.
Number of ink shots by printing and flushing
Amount of ink suction by cleaning and filling
When the amount of remaining ink is updated, it is written into the ink IC chip.
A cartridge error is issued according to the amount of remaining ink.
Calculation of the amount of consumed ink
Ink discharging during printing and flushing
The amount of ink consumed by ink discharging is calculated by counting the number of ink shots.
CJV30 counts ink shots for each row of nozzles and performs calculation by taking account of dot sizes (small,
middle and large). Therefore, there will be a smaller error between the measured value and the calculated value,
as compared with the conventional models.
Ink suction during cleaning and filling
The table below shows the amount of ink consumed for various operations. (For the 4-color ink set)
Operation
Ink consumption through one supply path [cc]
CJV30-60 CJV30-100 /
TPC-1000
CJV30-130 CJV30-160
SOFT cleaning 0.40
NORMAL cleaning 1.20
HARD cleaning 6.20
Maintenance filling 14.00
Initial filling
(No replacement)
Main suction 31.30 36.10 42.80 42.80
Cobble filling 4.70
Initial filling
(At replacement)
Main suction 31.30 36.10 42.80 42.80
Cobble filling 4.70
1.3.6 Monitoring of the Amount of Remaining Ink
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(For the 6-color / 6-color + W / 8-clor ink set)
Updating of the amount of remaining ink
The amount of remaining ink will be updated and written onto the ink IC chip at the timing shown below.
Operation
Ink consumption through one supply path [cc]
CJV30-60 CJV30-100 /
TPC-1000
CJV30-130 CJV30-160
SOFT cleaning 0.20
NORMAL cleaning 0.60
HARD cleaning 3.10
Maintenance filling 7.00
Initial filling
(No replacement)
Main suction 17.70 20.40 24.60 24.60
Initial filling
(At replacement)
Main suction 17.70 20.40 24.60 24.60
WHITE MAINTE. Lv.1 3.70
WHITE MAINTE. Lv.2 White 6.70
Color 3.70
WHITE MAINTE. Lv.3 White 12.20 12.70 15.70 15.70
Color 3.70
Spot color maintenance Color for per-
forming mainte-
nance
10.50 11.20 13.40 13.40
Other colors 3.10
No. Timing for updating Execution conditions
1 At pre-capping operation Ink has been used for printing or flushing.
At capping chiefly after completion of printing.
2 At completion of cleaning and filling operation Ink has been used for cleaning and filling.
The amount of ink remaining in the cartridge used for the
suction will be updated.
3 When any of the following events has occurred during
printing, cleaning or filling:
Cover OPEN
Lever UP
Media end
Updated by the amount of ink consumed before the occurrence
of any of the events shown at left.
4 When any of the following errors has occurred during
printing:
Cartridge near end
Cartridge ink end
Cartridge error
Updated just after occurrence of the error, not waiting for
writing at the capping pre-operation.
Updated before replacing the cartridge during printing.
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Monitoring of the Amount of Remaining Ink
1.2
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Use-up Cleaning
1.0
Rev.
1.3.7 Use-up Cleaning
As for Use-up cleaning
This function is available only for the 4-color ink set.
This function is intended to use the remaining ink in the cartridge where cartridge near end or cartridge ink end
occurs during cleaning with higher priority and prevent the ink of the normal cartridge from being consumed.
When one cartridge is a normal one at the start of cleaning, ink is sucked from the cartridge with residual ink first
and then switching to the normal cartridge takes place to continue cleaning.
When the residual ink is used up (software counter), INK REMAIN ZERO error is displayed, disabling the
cartridge.
Ink use-up cleaning control is only effective in NORMAL cleaning mode. It cannot be executed in any other
cleaning mode or at initial filling.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Ink Suction and Discharge Control
1.0
Rev.
1.3.8 Ink Suction and Discharge Control
Outline of Control
1. The ink suction and discharge mechanism is driven by roller pumps (ink suction pumps).
2. The amount of ink discharged to the waste ink tank is counted by the firmware, and warnings are issued depending
on the level. They are displayed in sequences involving ink suction and discharge, or locally.
3. The printer is equipped with an automatic cleaning mechanism (pump tube cleaning) to prevent ink solidification in
the waste ink tube connecting the inside of the cap to the waste ink tank.
4. Cleaning is performed by drawing washing liquid from the washing liquid cartridge to the cap using the siphon
principle. It is performed periodically when power is turned on/off.
System configuration
The system configuration of the ink suction and discharge mechanism is as shown below.
Outline flow
In initial filling for the 4-color ink set, to eject air completely from the ink paths, the suction is divided
into 2 stages, () filling up to the coupler, and () filling up to the nozzle. Each uses the sub cartridge
and control cartridge.
Print Head
Cap
Ink
Suction
Pump
W
a
s
h
i
n
g

l
i
q
u
i
d
c
a
r
t
r
i
d
g
e
Flow of washing liquid
Flow of ink
To waste ink tank
Supply Valve
Ink suction pump
1 washing liquid cartridge
Washing liquid cartridge PIC
Washing liquid cartridge sensor
Washing liquid near end sensor
1 supply valve
When filling 4-color ink set Except when filling the 4-color ink set
Filling up to the coupler
(sub cartridge selected)
Filling up to the nozzle
(controlled cartridge
selected)
Filling up to the nozzle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Initial Filling
1.2
Rev.
Operation sequence for initial filling
The sequence of initial ink filling is shown below:
1 Selection of ink type (ink type) Select a set value shown below.
Setting value: ES3 Sol, SS21 Sol
2 Selection of number of colors
(ink set)
Select a set value shown below.
Setting value: 4-Color (MMCCYYKK),
6-Color (MmCMcCKY),
6+W Color (MWCWYmKc) (Only when SS21 is selected)
8-Color (MSCWYmKc) (Only when ES3 is selected)
3 Preparing to fill the pre-fill up
solution
Discharge the transportation liquid remaining in the ink path.
4 Filling of pre-fill up solution Insert a pre-fill up solution cartridge in all slots to be sucked (all 8 cartridges).
Suction will not be performed if a warning about any pre-fill up solution cartridge is
displayed. (The pre-fill up solution cartridges do not incorporate an IC chip. Therefore,
IC chip read error is recognized to be normal.)
5 Discharging of the pre-fill up
solution
Discharge the pre-fill up solution.
6 Ink filling Insert the ink cartridges into all the slots and start ink filling.
When filling the 4-color ink set:
1. Fill ink up to the coupler. Within the same supply system, open the carriage valves in
the order of even columns odd columns, and fill the ink up to the coupler.
2. Fill ink up to the damper (head)
Except when filling the 4-color ink set:
1. Open all of the cartridge valves and fill the ink up to the damper (head).
Filling will not be executed if a warning about the ink cartridge is displayed.
If a cartridge warning is displayed after completion of filling ink up to the coupler
and before completion of filling ink up to the damper (head), switching between
the cartridges will take place and filling will be continued.
(Only for filling the 4-color ink set)
Filling will be discontinued if one supply system becomes unable to supply ink.
7 Washing liquid filling Fill the pump tube cleaning system with the dedicated washing liquid.
Make sure that the washing liquid cartridge has been inserted into the slot, and then
start supplying the solution.
Filling will not be executed if a warning about the washing liquid cartridge is displayed.
If filling any other than the 4-color ink set when this unit is installed, you have to change the coupler
before initial filling.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Expiry month and extension of expiry month for ink
1.0
Rev.
1.3.10 Expiry month and extension of expiry month for ink
About ink expiry month
It can be useable by month after next month of the ink expiry date described on the ink cartridge.
Here is the handle of expired
Example:If expiry month of your ink cartridge is February 2009.
Extension of ink expiry date (F/W Ver2.00)
The ink, which can be normally unusable two months after normal expiry month, can be extended for 6 months from
the expired month.
If the expired cartridge sets up, and also power is on with cartridge setting, the operation to confirm the extension
runs.
If the extended ink cartridge sets up, and also power is on with cartridge setting, the operation to confirm the exten-
sion runs.
It is possible to press only [ENTER] key. Get users to acknowledge the possibility of deteriorating image quality
since the extended ink cartridge is in use.
LED blinks in green if the extended cartridge is in use.
Feburuary March April May or later September or later
Printable continuously
Not Printable
Continuously
*1
*1.the machine returns to local mode every completion of printing one file.
Not printable (Unusable)
Not Printable(Unusable) /
Not extend expiry month
Red LED Blink Led LED lights Led LED lights
Expiration Expiration:1M Expiration:2M CONPLETELY EXPIRED
The setting is not changeable with the cartridge has been extended once
Deteriorating image quality may be appeared such as color change and banding if the cartridge is
extended. Get users to understand this.
The ink, which is more than 2 months has been elapsed since the cartridge was expired, can not be
useable for initial ink filling even though it can be extended.
EXTEND EXPIRE DATE?
YES < :> NO
NOT RECOMENDED!!
YES < > NO
EXPIRE DATE EXTENDED
PRESS[ENT]
<>
Alternately
Displayed
It is possible to press only [ENTER] key.
EXPIRED INK IN USE
PRESS [ENT]
NOT RECOMENDED!!
PRESS [ENT]
<>
Alternately
Displayed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
Replacing procedure
Current ink
-> Target ink
Shipping status
ES3 8-color
SS21 4-color ->
ES3 8-color
SS21 6-color ->
ES3 8-color
SS21 6-
color+White
-> ES3 8-color
ES3 4-color ->
ES3 8-color
ES3 6-color ->
ES3 8-color
Initial status Shipping status SS21 4-color SS21 6-color SS21 6-
color+White
ES3 4-color ES3 6-color
Step1
Version
check of F/W
and RLP
Check that JV33 F/W = Ver.4.60, CJV30 F/W = Ver.2.50 and RLP5 = Ver.2.2.
If they are not as above, perform version upgrade.
Step2
Head wash-
ing
Turning ON the
front power sup-
ply -> discharge
of solvent filling
liquid (SPC-
0475)
Select YES to
Do you change
an ink set? from
#ADJUST->
HEAD WASH.
Select NO to
Do you change
an ink set? from
#ADJUST->
HEAD WASH.
Select NO to
Do you change
an ink set? from
#ADJUST->
HEAD WASH.
Select YES to
Do you change
an ink set? from
#ADJUST->
HEAD WASH.
Select NO to
Do you change
an ink set? from
#ADJUST->
HEAD WASH.
MS washing liquid set -> washing
Step3
Replacing
UIS coupling
Replacing 4-color
with 8-color
Replacing 4-color
with 8-color
Step4
Replacing
damper
Replace 7th
damper only
(white is filled).
Do not replace
other than that.
Replace 7th
damper only
(white is filled).
Do not replace
other than that.
Replace 7th and
8th dampers
(white was filled).
Do not replace
other than those.
Replace 7th
damper only
(white is filled).
Do not replace
other than that.
Replace 7th
damper only
(white is filled).
Do not replace
other than that.
Step 5
Ink Filling
Select ES3 8-color for Choose an ink type.
ES3 8-Color
-> Filling
Step 6
Nozzle
Check
Nozzle check
Good If it is No Good, perform refilling until it becomes Good.
Step 7
Adjustment
Adjust
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Current ink
-> Target ink
ES3 8-color ->
SS21 4-color
ES3 8-color ->
SS21 6-color
ES3 8-color ->
SS21 6-
color+White
ES3 8-color ->
ES3 4-color
ES3 8-color ->
ES3 6-color
Initial status ES3 6-color+
White+Silver
ES3 8-color ES3 8-color ES3 8-color ES3 8-color
Step1
Version
check of F/W
and RLP
Step2
Head wash-
ing
Select YES to
Do you change
an ink set? from
#ADJUST->
HEAD WASH.
Select NO to
Do you change
an ink set? from
#ADJUST->
HEAD WASH.
Select NO to
Do you change
an ink set? from
#ADJUST->
HEAD WASH.
Select YES to
Do you change
an ink set? from
#ADJUST->
HEAD WASH.
Select NO to
Do you change
an ink set? from
#ADJUST->
HEAD WASH.
MS washing liquid set -> washing
Step3
Replacing
UIS coupling
Replacing 8-color
with 4-color
Replacing 8-color
with 4-color
Step4
Replacing
damper
Replace 7th and 8th dampers (white and silver were filled).
Do not replace other than those.
Step 5
Ink Filling
Select ES3 8-color for Choose an ink type.
SS21 4-color
-> Filling
SS21 6-color
-> Filling
SS21 6-
color+White
-> Filling
ES3 4-color
-> Filling
ES3 6-color
-> Filling
Step 6
Nozzle
Check
Nozzle check
If it is No Good, perform refilling until it becomes Good.
Step 7
Adjustment
Adjust
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Print & Cut
1.1
Basic Operation
1.2
1.3
Ink System
1.4
Print & Cut
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Block Diagram
2. Electrical Parts
2.1
Block Diagram
2.2
Operating Description
2.3
Circuit Board Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Block Diagram > Connection Diagram Inside the Main Body
1.1
Rev.
2.1.1 Connection Diagram Inside the Main Body
2.1.1 Connection Diagram Inside the Main Body
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Block Diagram > Block Diagram
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Block Diagram > Connection Diagram Outside the Main Body
1.0
Rev.
2.1.2 Connection Diagram Outside the Main Body
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Operating Description
2. Electrical Parts
2.1
Block Diagram
2.2
2.3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Operating Description > Operation Explanation
1.2
Rev.
2.2.1 Operation Explanation
Outline
This machines print head carriage has one head with 180 nozzles (180 dpi) x 8 rows.
Ink is ejected from the ink chamber by vibrating the piezoelectric elements of the heads.
For this vibration waveform, the printer uses variable waveform which can permit 4-step expressions (L, M, S and none).
The head is connected to the main PCB assy in the electrical box, and it is driven by a drive signal (COM waveform)
applied to the piezo of one nozzle row for each of the eight rows of nozzles.
FPGA (HDC) is mounted on the main PCB assy. The FPGA (HDC) applies the COM waveform in synchronization
with the scale interval of the linear encoder scale and simultaneously sends the nozzle data to the head.
In addition, the COM waveform is automatically corrected based on the registered head ID. It is also corrected
based on the ID registered in the head memory, other information, and the ambient air temperature detected.
(In case the head ID is not registered correctly, no ink may be ejected.)
The main PCB assy has FPGA (PDC), which takes charge of image processing and controls the SDRAM picture
memory (PRAM).
PRAM is mounted on PRAM PCB assy and the PRAM PCB assy has a capacity of 128 MB. Of the data output from
the host PC, the command part is analyzed by the CPU and the image part is transferred to the memory.
The PRAM is a ring memory and when data for one scanning session has been accumulated, the heads start
scanning. One scanning session creates images only in 180 dpi (6-colors / 6-colors+W / 7-colors / 8-colors) or in
360 dpi (4-colors) in the X direction. Therefore, the printer completes the image in the targeted resolution while
feeding the media by a required distance.
In case of printing by the use of pens and cutters, when the main PCB assy receives a command from I/F to
implement printing, it buffers the command to a memory for exclusive use (32MB SDRAM) and starts printing
by analyzing the command.
This model is equipped with many I/Os such as step motors and sensors. If all of them were connected directly to
the main PCB assy, routing the wiring and replacing the PCB would be difficult. To avoid this, a station PCB assy,
X-axis motor relay PCB assy and head slider PCB assy are connected with the main PCB assy in series, reducing
the number of signals exchanged. The signals are processed by the FPGA (IOC) mounted on the main PCB assy.
180 dpi
Scanning direction
Paper feeding direction
Nozzle Arrangement of Head (Rear View)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications
2. Electrical Parts
2.1
Block Diagram
2.2
2.3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Power Supply PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
Outline
Board name: Power Supply PCB Assy
This PCB provides all the electrical power for controlling and driving functions.
Input and output of the power source
Fuse rating
Connector specification
CN1 AC input connector
Model number (JST): B2P3-VH (LF) (SN)
CN2 AC HEAT input connector
Model number (JST): B03P-VL *Media heater power input
Input AC100-120V, AC220-240, 50/60Hz
Output +3.3SBV, 5.5A
+5SBV, 1.0A
+5V, 4.2A
+24V, 5.0A
+42V, 4.0A
F1 T6.3AH/ 250V |5x20 mm Input line to DC output circuit
F3 T15AH/ 250V |6.3x30 mm Input line to heater
Pin Terminal name Type
1 AC-L AC input supply
2 (NC) (NC)
3 AC-N AC input supply
1 AC-L AC input supply
2 (NC) (NC)
3 AC-N AC input supply
CN1
CN2
F3
CN3
CN4
CN5
VR2
VR4
VR3
VR1
F1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN3 Heater connector
Model number:
It is connected to the media heaters (Pre, Print, and After)
The element connection of the media heater is switched automatically according to the input voltage:
AC100-120V: Parallel connection
AC220-240V: Serial connection
CN4 HEAT ON/OFF
Model number (MOLEX): B6B-XH-A(LF) (SN)
CN5 DC output connector
Model number (MOLEX): 5566-18A
Note: GND and FG are directly processed in the power supply (pattern).
Volume specification
Pin Terminal name Type Pin Terminal name Type
1 HEAT3-1A HEATER 12 HEAT3-1B HEATER
5 HEAT3-THA THERMAL 16 HEAT3-THB THERMAL
1 HEAT1 ON SIGNAL
2 0V GND
3 HEAT2 ON SIGNAL
4 0V GND
5 HEAT3 ON SIGNAL
6 0V GND
Pin Terminal name Type Pin Terminal name Type
1 +42V DC power source 10 +42V DC power source
3 0V GND 12 0V GND
4 0V GND 13 0V GND
6 +5SBV DC power source 15 R/C(ON/OFF) DC power source
7 +3.3SBV DC power source 16 +3.3SBV DC power source
8 0V GND 17 0V GND
9 0V GND 18 0V GND
Voltage No Adjustable range Type
+3.3SBV VR1 3.28 3.32 During standby or for
main control
+5SBV VR2 4.98 5.02
+5V VR4 4.98 5.02 For I/O control
+24V
+42V VR3 41.0 41.2 For discharge or motor drive
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Power Supply PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Main PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
2.3.2 Main PCB Assy
Outline
Board name: Main PCB Assy
The CPU used is SH-3 (RISC, 133MHz) made by Hitachi.
A program for the CPU is written in flash memory. Version up of this program is easily executed on site through I/F.
The version up is carried out by downloading the program to PRAM through CPU and then by writing it in the flash
memory.
When received data is read from I/F, the CPU writes the data in PRAM through PDC. Then the data, after being
subjected to required processes by PDC-CTR, is transmitted to the HDC.
Receiving the data, the HDC creates head driving COM signals and nozzle data, and then transmits each data to the
ink slider PCB assy via HDC FFC cable.
In case of printing by the use of pens and cutters, when the main PCB assy receives a command from I/F to
implement printing, it buffers the command to a memory for exclusive use (32MB SDRAM) and starts printing by
analyzing the command.
The main PCB assy also has X, Y-axis motor driving circuit and other I/O control circuits.
2.3.2 Main PCB Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
List of connectors
Test point
Fuse rating
CN No Pin Connected to: Remarks
CN1 30 Ink Slider PCB Assy Head, IO signal
CN2 50 Ink Slider PCB Assy Head signal
CN3 30 Ink Slider PCB Assy Power source
CN4 30 Ink Slider PCB Assy COM drive
CN5 6 Power Supply PCB Assy Heater control
CN6 6 Debug Monitor FPGA/CPLD writing
CN7 80 PRAM PCB Assy
CN8 50 Cutter Driver PCB Assy Control signal
CN9 6 Debug Monitor FPGA
CN10 8 Cutter Driver PCB Assy Power source
CN11 4 USB I/F USB2.0
CN12 80 AUX. Extension IF PCB Assy
CN13 5 AUX. Extension IF PCB Assy
CN14 40 Station PCB Assy
CN15 30 X-axis Motor Relay PCB Assy
CN16 28 X-axis Motor Relay PCB Assy
CN17 10 Regenerative Resistivity PCB Assy
CN18 2 HDC Fan
CN19 2 AUX. AUX.
CN20 3 AUX.
CN21 7 Thermistor Media heater temperature detection
CN22 4 Serial Debug Monitor AUX.
CN23 100 Debug Board FW program writing
CN24 18 Power Supply PCB Assy
CN25 5 Y-axis Motor Encoder
CN26 8 G/A Debug Monitor AUX.
CN27 3 Y-axis Motor
CN28 4 Not used
CN29 2 X-axis Motor
Terminal name Application
GND2, 6 GND
TP1-8 COM voltage (1-8)
F13 0.375A/ 125V 42 V power supply for heads
CN11
CN6
CN23
CN25
CN28
CN26
CN17
CN27
CN7
CN9
CN8
CN1
CN20
F13
CN24
CN19
CN2
CN3
CN5 CN21
CN18
GND2
GND6
CN10 CN14
CN15
CN29
CN16
TP8
TP7
TP6
TP5
TP4
TP3
TP2
TP1
CN4
CN12
CN13
CN22
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Main PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > PRAM PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
2.3.3 PRAM PCB Assy
Outline
Board name: 128MB PRAM PCB Assy
Is located on the main PCB assy inside the electrical box.
128 MB picture memory is mounted.
List of connectors
CN1 80 Main PCB Assy
CN2 80 AUX.
CN1 CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Regenerative Resistivity PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
2.3.4 Regenerative Resistivity PCB Assy
Outline
Board name: Regenerative Resistivity PCB Assy
Controls counter electromotive voltage by supplying the electrical power to the motor via this PCB.
List of connectors
Test point
CN1 10 Main PCB Assy Power supply to the X and Y-axis motors
TP1 +42V
TP2 Power supply voltage of the motor
TP2
TP1
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Cutter Driver PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
2.3.5 Cutter Driver PCB Assy
Outline
Board name: Cutter Driver PCB Assy
Controls I/O for the pen head, mark sensor and PR sensor.
List of connectors
Test point
CN1 50 Main PCB Assy Control
CN2 8 Main PCB Assy Power source (for solenoids)
CN3 17 Cutter Slider PCB Assy Control / Power source
TP1 Output voltage of mark sensor
TPG1 GND
CN2
CN4
CN1
CN3
TP1
TPG1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Station PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
Outline
Board name: Station PCB Assy
Is located on the side panel inside the right cover.
The pump motor, vacuum fan, paper sensor, Y-origin sensor and other main body control I/Os are connected to this PCB.
List of connectors
CN2 20 AUX.
CN3 24 Keyboard
CN4 4 Sleep Switch
CN5 2 AUX.
CN6 4 Washing Cartridge, ID Contact PCB Assy
CN7 2 P Head Lock Solenoid
CN8 18 External Unit Output Take-up, Exhaust Fan, Dry Fan
CN9 10 Vacuum Fan
CN10 4 Washing Cartridge Sensor
CN11 - Not used
CN12 7 Paper Sensor (R)
CN13 9 Clamp Sensor, Y-origin Sensor
CN14 4 AUX.
CN15 3 AUX.
CN16 3 AUX.
CN17 8 Wiper Unit Wiper Motor, Wiper-origin
CN18 9 Pump Motor
CN19 6 AUX.
CN1
CN20
CN5
CN8 CN9
CN12
CN2
CN2
CN13
CN14
CN15
CN16
CN17
CN18
CN19
CN6
CN10
CN7
CN4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > X-axis Motor Relay PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
Outline
Board name: X-axis Motor Relay PCB Assy
Is located on the back of the ink cartridge unit inside the left cover.
The solenoids of the 8 ink cartridges, ID, ink near end sensor, cartridge sensor, LED PCB assy, cover sensor,
maintenance cover sensor, etc. are connected to it.
List of connectors
CN2 20 LED PCB Assy
CN4 4 Ink Cartridge 1
CN12 16 Ink Solenoid (1-8)
CN13 18 Ink ID (1-8)
CN14 6 X-axis Motor Encoder
CN15 5 Not equipped AUX.
CN16 2 AUX.
CN17 2 AUX.
CN18 3 AUX. AUX.
CN19 6 Not equipped AUX.
CN20 2 AUX. AUX.
CN21 2 AUX.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
CN1
CN14
CN21
CN15
CN16
CN17
CN2
CN19
CN20
CN4 CN5 CN6 CN7
CN8 CN9 CN10 CN11
CN12
CN13
CN3
CN18 CN18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Ink Slider PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
Outline
Board name: Ink Slider PCB Assy
Is located on the top of the print part slider.
FFC from main PCB assy is connected to this PCB to relay signals to print head. In addition, the encoder PCB assy,
head height sensor, etc. are connected to this PCB.
List of connectors
Test point
CN1 30 Main PCB Assy IO control
CN2 50 Main PCB Assy Head control
CN3 30 Main PCB Assy Power source
CN4 30 Main PCB Assy COM waveform
CN5 35 Print Head
CN6 31 Print Head
CN7 4 AUX.
CN8 6 AUX.
CN9 3 Head Height Sensor
CN10 5 Linear Encoder PCB Assy
CN11 2 AUX.
CN12 3 AUX.
CN13 11 Head Memory PCB Assy Head memory
CN14 6 None AUX.
TP5 VBS (+8V)
TP6-13 COM1-8 (A-H)
TPG3, 5 GND
TP5
TPG5
TPG3
TP6
TP8
TP11
TP10
TP7
TP9
TP12
TP13
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN8 CN12 CN11
CN9
CN7
CN10
CN13
CN14
CN6
CN4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Cutter Slider PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
Outline
Board name: Cutter Slider PCB Assy
Is located on the top of the head part slider.
FFC from cutter driver PCB assy is connected to this PCB to relay signals to pen head.
Connecting sensor, mark sensor, auto cutter blade, etc. are connected to this PCB.
List of connectors
Test point
CN1 17 Cutter Driver PCB Assy IO
CN2 4 Mark Sensor
CN3 2 Pen Solenoid
CN4 3 Connecting Sensor
CN5 2 LED Pointer
CN6 3 Auto Cutter Blade Solenoid
CN7 3 PR Sensor
CN8 2 PR Switch Solenoid
TP1 Output voltage of mark sensor
TPG1 GND
CN1
CN3
CN2
CN7
CN4
TP1
TPG1
CN8
CN6
CN5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Head Memory PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
Outline
Board name: Head Memory PCB Assy
Stores Head ID information. Is provided together with the head(s), and does not operate independently.
List of connectors
CN1 3 Head Heating Thermistor Not used.
CN2 11 Ink Slider PCB Assy
CN3 2 Head Heating Heater Not used.
CN4 2 Head Heating Heater Not used.
CN2
CN4
CN3
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > LED PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
2.3.11 LED PCB Assy
Outline
Board name: LED PCB Assy
Is located at the front of the ink cartridge unit inside the left cover.
The FFC from the X-axis relay PCB assy is connected to this PCB. The LEDs (green, red) corresponding to each slot
of the cartridge is displayed on the LED PCB assy.
List of connectors
CN1 20 X-axis Relay PCB Assy
CN2 6 None AUX.
CN2
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Keyboard PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
Outline
Board name: Keyboard PCB Assy
Has LCD with 2 lines of 20 characters and key switches. It is connected to the station PCB assy with a keyboard cable.
List of connectors
CN1 16 LCD PCB Assy Control
CN2 24 Station PCB Assy
CN1
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Take-up PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
2.3.13 Take-up PCB Assy
Outline
Board name: Take-up PCB SK Assy
This PCB is connected to the station PCB assy via external connector, which can be attached or removed by users. It
is used inside the take-up motor unit, as a junction between the station PCB assy and take-up motor.
List of connectors
CN1 9 External Connector Cable
(Station PCB Assy)
Power source
CN2 5 Start, direction changing switch
CN3 6 Take-up Motor
CN3
CN1
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts
3. Workflow
3.1
Ink Related Parts
3.2
Cut Head Carriage
3.3
Driving Parts
3.4
Electrical Parts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of the Head Unit
1.1
Rev.
3.1.1 Replacement of the Head Unit
List of replacement procedures
Item Work operation Description Ref.
Covers 1. Removal of covers, etc. Remove the front cover and print head cover. 6.1.1
Print Head
Unit Assy
2. Preparation of the new head and
cleaning of its inside
Fill the head with the water-based transportation liquid
(S-46) before shipment from the factory. If ink is charged while
the head is in original state (the S-46 is inside the head), it reacts
chemically with the solvent ink, with a precipitate being formed.
Therefore, until a new head is installed, it is necessary to clean
the head with the washing liquid (MS washing liquid) used
exclusively when replacing the S head.
6.2.1
3. Removal of the head. Remove the damper before removing the disused head. 6.2.2
4. Mounting of the head. Mount the new head which has been cleaned. 6.2.3
5. Check of the head ID Check the head ID and enter it manually when necessary.
(Normally, manual entry is not necessary because writing is
carried out automatically.)
4.2.6
Ink 6. Ink charge into the head Fill the head with ink and carry out test plotting.
Check for any nozzle outs or flight deflection of ink droplets.
Check 7. Head slant adjustment Mechanically adjust the replaced head. 4.2.1
8. Correction of dot position
(Press the key [ADJUST])
Adjust dot locations. 4.2.2
9. Correction of dot position
(Press the key [SET UP])
Make adjustment by (pressing the key) [DROP.POScorrect]
of user mode.
Covers 10. Mounting of the covers Mount the covers that have been removed. 6.1.1
Be sure to wear protective glasses and working gloves during the operation.
Ink may get into your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch
the ink.
Head Unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of the Cap Assy
1.1
Rev.
3.1.2 Replacement of the Cap Assy
Covers 1. Removal of covers, etc. Remove the station cover U, W ink guard and wiring cover. 6.1.1
Cap Assy 2. Removal of the cap assy. Remove the cap assy while pushing the PC pipes to the side. 6.2.6
3. Mounting of the cap assy. Attach the cap assy while pushing it toward you. 6.2.6
4. Adjustment of the capping Carry out CAPPING (by using the key) [# ADJUST].
CAPPING POS: 3 mm to the right from the uppermost
position of the cap slider.
AirPullPOS.: The point exactly where the head comes
into contact with the cap (left end)
FlushingPOS: Position of the head and the left end of
the cap, which sets the clearance
between them at 1 mm.
WiperPOS(X): The point where the center of the wiper
is aligned with the center of the head
4.2.5
Check 5. Cleaning operation Check whether each assembly and adjustment has been carried
out properly by conducting [WIPER CLEANING] operation.
Covers 6. Mounting of the covers. Mount the covers that have been removed. 6.1.1
the ink.
Cap Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of the Cartridge Assy
1.1
Rev.
3.1.3 Replacement of the Cartridge Assy
Covers 1. Removal of covers, etc. Remove the ICU cover, cartridge holder B and cartridge base
U.
6.1.1
Ink 2. Ink discharging Discharge ink by carrying out [HEAD WASH] of the main-
tenance function.
4.2.7
Cartridge
Assy
3. Removal of the joint. Remove the joint from corresponding cartridge.
Take care not to spill ink.
4. Removal of the cartridge. Disconnect the cables of corresponding cartridges from the
connector to remove the cartridges.
5. Mounting of the cartridge. Mount the cartridge.
6. Mounting of the joint. Mount the joint which has been removed.
Check 7. Check on the sensors Check whether the exist/non-exist sensor, the near end sensor
and the contact PCB assy of corresponding cartridges function
normally, by conducting ink cartridge test.
It is preferable to conduct a check by actually using cartridges.
5.1.14
Ink 8. Ink filling Fill up the ink channels with ink.
Check for any nozzle outs by conducting a test plotting.
Covers 9. Mounting of the covers. Mount the covers that have been removed. 6.1.1
the ink.
Cartridge Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Driving Parts > Replacement of the Wiper Unit
1.1
Rev.
3.1.4 Replacement of the Wiper Unit
Covers 1. Removal of covers, etc. Remove the station cover U and C station cover 2. 6.1.1
Wiper Unit 2. Removal of the wiper unit. Remove the wiper unit. 6.4.6
3. Mounting of the wiper unit Mount the wiper unit.
Check whether the wiper moves smoothly while the
clearance between the motor pedestal and the wiper drive
link is set at 0.5 mm.
6.4.6
4.3.7
4. Adjustment of wiper height Make adjustment so that, while head height is set low, wiper
units are kept parallel and wiper is in contact with the tip of
the nozzle by 1.5 mm. Confirm that wiping operation is
possible even when the head height is set high.
4.3.4
Adjustment 5. Capping adjustment Carry out [CAPPING] adjustment to confirm that each
center of the wiper and the head is aligned.
4.2.5
Check 6. Cleaning operation Check whether each assembly and adjustment has been
carried out properly by conducting [WIPER CLEANING]
operation.
Ink may get into your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you
touch the ink.
Wiper Unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Cut Head Carriage
3. Workflow
3.1
Ink Related Parts
3.2
Cut Head Carriage
3.3
Driving Parts
3.4
Electrical Parts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Cut Head Carriage > Replacement of the Pen Assy and LED Pointer
1.1
Rev.
3.2.1 Replacement of the Pen Assy and LED Pointer
Covers 1. Removal of covers, etc. Remove the C head cover, CY cover F and auto cutter assy.
Be sure not to change the direction of the hook of the
baffle SP. If its direction is changed, the pen pressure and
landing are also changed.
6.1.1
Pen assy,
LED pointer
2. Removal of the pen assy. Remove the pen assy. 6.3.1
3. Removal of the LED pointer. Remove the LED pointer from the pen assy.
4. Mounting of the LED pointer. Mount the LED pointer to the pen assy.
In installation, pay attention to harness treatment.
5. Mounting of the pen assy. Mount the pen assy.
Adjustment 6. Adjustment of the pen stroke Adjust the pen stroke at 3 0.3 mm.
7. Adjustment of the mounting
location of the cutter
Hold down the clamp lever and adjust the mounting location
so that the distance between the auto cutter assy and the
platen is set at 8.8 mm.
4.3.2
8. Adjustment of pen pressure and
pen landing
Adjust the [PEN PRESSURE] and [LANDING]. 4.2.9
4.2.10
9. Adjustment of photo sensor
sensitivity
Corrects the output value of the MARK sensor
automatically.
4.2.11
10. Adjustment of the position of the
photo sensor
Adjust the [#PHOTOsens./POSITION] in [#ADJUST]. 4.2.12
Check 11. Check each performance Check the [CUT PATTERN] and cutting position. Carry out
print & cut online to confirm no misalignment is found.
LED Pointer
Pen Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Cut Head Carriage > Replacement of the Auto Cutter Assy
1.1
Rev.
3.2.2 Replacement of the Auto Cutter Assy
Covers 1. Removal of covers, etc. Remove the C head cover, CY cover F and S guide. 6.1.1
Auto Cutter
Assy
2. Removal of the auto cutter assy. Be sure not to change the direction of the hook of the baffle
SP. If its direction is changed, the pen pressure and landing
are also changed.
6.3.1
3. Mounting of the auto cutter assy. Mount the auto cutter assy.
Adjustment 4. Adjustment of the mounting
location of the cutter
(If necessary, check to see if the magnet catcher and magnet
BKT are in contact with each other.)
4.3.2
Check 5. Check the performance. Check the cutting position.
Covers 6. Mounting of the covers Mount the covers that have been removed.
Install the S guide while pushing it to the left.
6.1.1
Auto Cutter Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Cut Head Carriage > Replacement of the Mark Assy
1.1
Rev.
3.2.3 Replacement of the Mark Assy
Covers 1. Removal of covers, etc. Remove the C head cover and CY cover F. 6.1.1
Mark Assy 2. Removal of the auto cutter assy
and pen assy.
Be sure not to change the direction of the hook of the baffle
SP. If its direction is changed, the pen pressure and landing
are also changed.
6.3.1
3. Removal of the mark assy. Remove the mark assy. 6.3.3
4. Mounting of the mark assy. Mount the mark assy.
Set the pressure of all the clamps to Middle, and clamp the
assy. Then adjust so that the assy is positioned 2.5 mm above
the platen on the right station side.
6.3.3
5. Mounting of the pen assy and
auto cutter assy.
Mount the auto cutter assy. 6.3.1
Adjustment 6. Adjustment of the pen stroke. Adjust so that the pen stroke is 3 0.3 mm as measured from
the pen point.
7. Adjustment of the mounting
location of the cutter.
4.3.2
8. Adjustment of the sensitivity of
the photo sensor
Adjust the [#PHOTO SENS./ LV.] in [#ADJUST]. 4.2.11
9. Adjustment of the position of the
photo sensor
Adjust the position of the photo sensor in [#ADJUST]. 4.2.12
10. Adjustment of pen pressure and
pen landing
Adjust the [PEN PRESSURE] and [LANDING]. 4.2.9
4.2.10
11. Pointer offset
12. Print / Cut
Check 13. Check each performance Check the [CUT PATTERN] and cutting position. Carry out
print & cut online to confirm no misalignment is found.
In installation, pay attention to harness treatment.
6.1.1
Once the S guide is removed, reinstall it while pushing the solenoid outward.
Mark Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Driving Parts
3. Workflow
3.1
Ink Related Parts
3.2
Cut Head Carriage
3.3
Driving Parts
3.4
Electrical Parts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Driving Parts > Replacement of the X-axis Motor
1.0
Rev.
3.3.1 Replacement of the X-axis Motor
Covers 1. Removal of covers, etc. Remove the maintenance cover L, cartridge cover and left
cover.
6.1.1
X-axis Motor 2. Removal of the X-axis motor. Remove the X-axis motor. 6.4.1
3. Mounting of the X-axis motor. Mount the X-axis motor.
Adjustment 4. Adjustment of the motor current If a hunting noise occurs while the motor is being driven,
adjust the X-axis motor current.
4.2.14
the ink.
X-axis Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Driving Parts > Replacement of the Y-axis Motor
1.1
Rev.
3.3.2 Replacement of the Y-axis Motor
Covers 1. Removal of covers, etc. Remove the CY cover F, KB cover, right cover and D BKT
cover.
6.1.1
Y-axis Motor 2. Removal of the Y-axis motor. Remove the Y-axis motor. 6.4.2
3. Mounting of the Y-axis motor. Mount the Y-axis motor.
Adjustment 4. Adjustment of the motor current If a hunting noise occurs while the motor is being driven,
adjust the Y-axis motor current.
4.2.14
the ink.
Y-axis Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Driving Parts > Replacement of the Y Drive Belt
1.1
Rev.
3.3.3 Replacement of the Y Drive Belt
Covers 1. Removal of covers, etc. Remove the CY cover F, KB cover and right cover. 6.1.1
Y Drive Belt 2. Removal of the Y drive belt. Remove the Y drive belt. 6.4.4
3. Mounting of the Y drive belt. Mount the Y drive belt.
the ink.
Y Drive Belt
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Driving Parts > Replacement of the Linear Encoder Scale
1.0
Rev.
3.3.4 Replacement of the Linear Encoder Scale
Covers 1. Removal of covers, etc. Remove the CY cover F and head cover. 6.1.1
Linear
Encoder Scale
2. Removal of the linear encoder scale. Remove the linear encoder scale. 6.4.5
3. Removal of the protective film Peel off the protective film from the encoder.
4. Mounting of the linear encoder scale. Mount the linear encoder scale.
Pay attention to the location of the encoder PCB assy.
Check 5. Encoder check Carry out the encoder check to confirm it functions normally. 4.3.5
5.1.26
the ink.
Linear Encoder Scale
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Driving Parts > Replacement the GR Roller Assy
1.1
Rev.
3.3.5 Replacement the GR Roller Assy
Covers 1. Removal of covers, etc. Remove the CY cover F, cartridge cover, maintenance cover
L, left cover, left station cover, heater connector cover, MS
cover 2 and MS cover 1.
6.1.1
GR Roller
Assy
2. Removal of the GR roller assy. Remove the GR roller assy. 6.4.7
3. Mounting of the GR roller assy. Move the BR holder 30 until it reaches the near side and
stops, and then mount the GR roller assy.
Check 4. Check on the surface of the platen When the clearance between the head and the platen is not
stabilized and printed image is affected by that, adjust the
flatness of the platen.
Adjustment 5. GR/PR adjustment Make the machine recognize the positional relationship
between the grid rollers and pinch rollers.
4.2.13
Install all the covers temporarily first and then secure them
in order, starting with the one nearest one end.
Install the covers while pushing the pre-heater down.
(To ensure the space for the pick up chamber and to prevent
the covers from rising above the grid rollers)
6.1.1
Ink may get into your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you
touch the ink.
GR Roller Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Electrical Parts
3. Workflow
3.1
Ink Related Parts
3.2
Cut Head Carriage
3.3
Driving Parts
3.4
Electrical Parts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Electrical Parts > Replacement of the Main PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
3.4.1 Replacement of the Main PCB Assy
Advance
preparation
1. Parameter upload Before the printed-circuit board is replaced, upload its
parameter to the PC.
Covers 2. Removal of covers, etc. Remove the electrical box cover. 6.1.1
Main PCB
Assy
3. Removal of the main PCB assy. Remove the main PCB assy. 6.4.7
4. Mounting of the main PCB assy. Mount the main PCB assy.
Check 5. Parameter download Download the parameter which has been uploaded in the
operation 1.
6. Adjustment of the motor current Adjust motor current in case a hunting noise occurs. 4.2.14
Covers 7. Mounting of the cover. Mount the cover that have been removed. 6.1.1
Main PCB Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Operation Matrix
4. Adjustment Items
4.1
Operation Matrix
4.2
Adjustment Function
4.3
Mechanical Adjustment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Operation Matrix > Matrix of Operations and Adjustments
1.1
Rev.
4.1.1 Matrix of Operations and Adjustments
When dealing with malfunctions, see Troubleshooting.
*
1
Be sure to make adjustment before replacing the main PCB assy.
*
2
See Chapter 4, Technical Information of Service Documents.
Adjustment item
Work contents
U
p
l
o
a
d
i
n
g

o
f

P
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
s
D
o
w
n
l
o
a
d
i
n
g

o
f

P
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
s
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

o
f

t
h
e

m
o
t
o
r

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

(
4
.
2
.
1
4
)
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

o
f

t
h
e

p
e
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

(
4
.
2
.
1
1
)
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

o
f

t
h
e

p
e
n

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
4
.
2
.
9
)
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

o
f

t
h
e

p
e
n

l
a
n
d
i
n
g

(
4
.
2
.
1
0
)
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

o
f

t
h
e

c
u
t
t
e
r

l
a
n
d
i
n
g
D
i
s
t
a
n
c
e

a
c
c
u
r
a
c
y
/
R
i
g
h
t

a
n
g
l
e

a
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

(
4
.
2
.
8
)
A
d
j
u
s
t
i
n
g

t
h
e

l
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

m
a
r
k

s
e
n
s
o
r

(
p
h
o
t
o

s
e
n
s
o
r
)

(
4
.
3
.
1
)
A
d
j
u
s
t
i
n
g

t
h
e

s
e
n
s
i
t
i
v
i
t
y

o
f

m
a
r
k

s
e
n
s
o
r

(
p
h
o
t
o

s
e
n
s
o
r
)

(
4
.
2
.
1
1
)
A
d
j
u
s
t
i
n
g

t
h
e

p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

o
f

m
a
r
k

s
e
n
s
o
r

(
4
.
2
.
1
2
)
A
u
t
o

c
u
t
t
e
r

b
l
a
d
e

p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

a
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

(
4
.
3
.
2
)
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

o
f

o
u
t
p
u
t

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
S
e
n
s
o
r

t
e
s
t

(
5
.
1
.
1
4
)
S
l
a
n
t

a
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

(
4
.
2
.
1
)
D
r
o
p

p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

a
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

(
4
.
2
.
2
)
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

o
f

C
a
p
p
i
n
g
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

p
a
r
t

r
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

(
4
.
2
.
1
9
)
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

o
f

t
h
e

w
i
p
e
r

h
e
i
g
h
t

(
4
.
3
.
4
)
Firmware update*
1,
*
2

Pen assy removal or replacement

Auto cutter assy removal or replacement

Mark assy removal or replacement

Head PCB assy replacement

Main PCB replacement
*
1

X-axis motor assy removal or replacement

Y-axis motor assy removal or replacement

Power supply unit

Head removal or replacement

Cap replacement

Pump replacement

Damper

Auto cutter blade removal or replacement

Wiper assy removal or replacement

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function
4. Adjustment Items
4.1
Operation Matrix
4.2
Adjustment Function
4.3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > [HEAD ADJUST] SLANT ADJUST
1.0
Rev.
Function
Makes mechanical adjustment of print head slant while checking the pattern. Make this adjustment when replacing
the head.
Procedure
1. Select [SLANT ADJUST] from the operation menu to execute
adjustment pattern drawing.
2. Move the head over the platen using the JOG key.
3. Lift up the two AD locking levers to release the lock, and move
the adjusting lever to adjust the slant of the head.
4. Carry out the slant adjustment through the following procedures.
As shown in the diagram on the left, patterns of columns a
and columns b are printed alternately at a pitch width of
approximately 100 mm. The discrimination between columns
a and columns b is performed by the magenta and cyan
strips (indicated by the thick red arrows in the diagram on the
left) printed over the respective patterns at the top of head 1.
These strips indicate that magenta is column a and cyan is
column b.
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
HEAD ADJUST <ent>
#HEAD ADJUST
SLANT ADJUST <ent>
#SLANT ADJUST
PRINT START <ent>
[FUNCTION]
Adjustment pattern
drawing
AD Locking Lever
Adjusting Lever
Movement per one scale of the adjusting lever: 40 m
Columns b Columns a Columns b Columns a
Slant confirmation point
Columns b
Columns a
M
C
C
M
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Check the slant of each column.
For the columns b, the relationship between the points of
impact and the slant of the head is as shown in the diagram
on the left.
For the columns a, the pattern is reversed.
Perform an averaging adjustment.
The standard color for each column is M for columns a
and c for columns b.
Move the adjustment lever and adjust the slant.
In the diagram on the left, the columns b are aligned while
the columns a are misaligned. In this case, move b
columns slightly so that the degrees of scattering of a and
b columns are equal. (=Intermediate adjustment)
<Actual Image> <Scope Image>
When tilted towards the back right
(move the adjustment lever in the
clockwise direction)
When tilted towards the front right
(move the adjustment lever in the
anti-clockwise direction)
<Adjustment Example>
Columns b Columns a
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > [HEAD ADJUST] SLANT ADJUST
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > [HEAD ADJUST] DROP.POS ADJUST
1.1
Rev.
4.2.2 [HEAD ADJUST] DROP.POS ADJUST
Function
Adjusts the location of impact points during to-and-fro movement of printing operation. Provides a baseline value for
user compensation value.
Is used when modifying ink type or making strict adjustment during installation.
Procedure
1. Select DROP POS. from the operation menu.
2. Select a scan speed to be used as a standard.
Selection item: Normal/HiSPEED (*Initial setting: HiSPEED)
[] / []: Switches scan speed.
[ENTER]: Finalizes (To Next)
3. Select a resolution to be used as a standard.
Selection item: DRAFT (540dpi)/ FINE (720dpi)
[] / []: Switches Resolution.
Adjustment Value
Return
Path
Outward
Path
<LOCAL.-> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
HEAD ADJUST <ent>
#HEAD ADJUST
DROP.POS ADJUST <ent>
[FUNCTION]
Make sure to check the [HEAD HEIGHT].
Head height is adjusted at [Thin] before shipment.
Since only an alternative adjustment value is
prepared, the baseline is also adjusted at [Thick] by
adjusting at [Thick].
#DROP POS. MODE
SELECT :HiSPEED SCAN
:Normal-SCAN
The same adjusted value is applied to both scan
speeds. Therefore, there is no need of making
adjustment for each speed.
(Make adjustment only for one speed.)
#DROP POS. HsLg
SELECT :DRAFT
:FINE
:DRAFT2
:FINE2
Adjusts all of DRAFT, FINE, DRAFT2, and FINE2.
4.2.2 [HEAD ADJUST] DROP.POS ADJUST
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4. Carry out printing in order of [Y Bi] and [FINE-Y Bi].
After adjusting the Y return (Y Bi), perform fine adjustment of
the fine Y return (FINE-Y Bi).
[] / []: Switches
5. Check the pattern.
Y Bi
Check the overlapping parts of the patterns of the outward
and return paths.
FINE-Y Bi
Only the raw D is used for drawing the pattern. Adjust the
pattern until the two lines overlap, using the scope.
Adjusting value: -50.0 to 50.0 dot (unit: 0.1 dot)
6. Enter the adjustment value.
#DROP POS. HsLgDRFT
ADJUST :Y Bi
:FINE-Y Bi
#DROP POS. HsLgDRFT
Y Bi PRINT <ent>
Pattern drawing
Adjustment Value
Return
Path
Outward
Path
#DROP POS. HsLgDRFT
Y Bi :-.0
When this adjustment has been made, previously
adjusted value of [DROP.POScorrect] is cleared.
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > [HEAD ADJUST] DROP.POS ADJUST
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > EDGE ADJUST
1.1
Rev.
4.2.3 EDGE ADJUST
Function
Adjust the width of the each dead space of the right and left ends of the media.
Since media detection is carried out by the pinch roller, make adjustment so that location of patterns is inside both ends
of the pinch roller, which is the usable plot area.
Is used when the system parameter has been initialized or the (plot areas at both ends) are not in the right place.
Procedure
1. Select [EDGE ADJUST] from the operation menu.
2. Draw an adjustment pattern.
[]: Set adjust values of L and R to default (0.0 mm).
[]: Execute media width detection to draw an
adjustment pattern.
[]: To the screen for adjustment (Without drawing)
3. Check the adjustment pattern.
4. Enter the adjustment value.
For adjustment, input actual values obtained by measuring from
the inner end of the pinch roller to the pattern.
Adjusting value: 0.0 to 35.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm)
(Use the inside of pinch roller as a positive (+). The backlash of
the pinch roller may produce an error of approx. 0.5 mm.
[] / []: Changes adjustment values.
[END]: Cancellation of input
Media width
Left end of pinch roller Right end of pinch roller
<LOCAL.-> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST / PRINT
EDGE ADJUST <ent>
[FUNCTION]
Make adjustment with [EXPANDS] of [COMMON
SETUP] turned OFF.
#EDGE ADJUST
CLEAR < > PRINT
Pattern drawing
Media width
#EDGE ADJUST
L=15.0 R=15.0
The set value is saved in the system parameter No.2
R GRIP and No.3 L GRIP.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > MEDIA COMP.2
1.0
Rev.
4.2.4 MEDIA COMP.2
Function
Compensates basic feeding amount of media. (Provides a baseline value for user compensation value.)
Is used to adjust the media feed amount when the parameter has been initialized or user compensation value is too large.
Procedure
1. Select [MEDIA COMP.2] from the operation menu.
2. Draw an adjustment pattern.
[ENTER]: Executes drawing.
[]: To the screen for adjustment
(Without drawing)
[END]: Completes drawing and inputs compensation
value.
3. Check the adjustment pattern.
4. Enter the compensation value.
Compensation value: -500 to 500
[] / []: Changes adjustment values.
<LOCAL.-> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST / PRINT
MEDIA COMP.2 <ent>
#MEDIA COMP.2
PRINT START :ent
Pattern drawing
Patterns are plotted repeatedly.
(Click [END] to end plotting.)
A pattern having width
of media is drawn.
Resolution is 720 dpi.
Compensation value is
too large.
Compensation value is
too small.
#MEDIA COMP.2
VALUE
In actual feeding amount compensation, compensation
value for each media set in the SETUP function are
added to this compensation value.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > CAPPING
1.1
Rev.
4.2.5 CAPPING
Outline
Adjusts the location for capping and wiper. Adjusted value is saved in the system parameter.
Basically, it is not necessary to make adjustment even when cap (and the like) has been replaced.
Adjustment procedure
1. Select [CAPPING] from the operation menu.
2. Make adjustment so that the cap slider is located at 3 mm to the
right from the uppermost point it has reached on the cap base.
[] / []: Horizontally shifts the cap.
3. Make adjustment so that the head is located exactly at the point
where the head is in contact with rubber portion (left end) of the
cap head.
[] / []: Shifts the cap.
4. Make adjustment so that the clearance between the head and left
end of the cap is set at 1 mm.
[] / []: Shifts the cap.
5. Make adjustment so that each center of the wiper and the head
coincides.
[] / []: Horizontally shifts the wiper.
[ENTER]: Finalizes
[END]: Completes
<LOCAL.*> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST / PRINT
CAPPING <ent>
#CAPPING
CAPPING POS= 0.0mm
3mm
#CAPPING
AirPullPOS.= 0.0mm
1
m
m
#CAPPING
FlushingPOS= 0.0mm
#CAPPING
WiperPOS(X)= 0.0mm
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > HEAD ID
1.1
Rev.
4.2.6 HEAD ID
Function
Head ID input of this machine is automatically executed by the printer side.
The head memory PCB assy is mounted on the head unit assy, and the ID information is written in the head memory
PCB assy.
Procedure (In case of manual input)
1. Prepare a head ID.
2. Select [HEAD ID] from the operation menu.
3. Enter the head ID.
[ENTER]: Determines and saves.
Head ID is for compensating differences of discharge amount of ink among each head. A label on which a
compensation value (ID: in 24 digits) is written is attached on a head at the factory shipment.
Storing this ID in the Parameter of this machine makes print quality constant.
Manual input of the ID information is required in the following cases.
In a case that the ID information is not stored in the head memory PCB assy:
[HEAD ID Un input] is displayed on the panel (at power on)
Pay attention when replacing PCB, because even if the head ID is not identical to the ID information in
the memory PCB assy (a PCB of another head is placed, for example), the error is not displayed on the panel.
Manual input of ID is recommended if there is a doubt on the agreement between the ID of a head and the
ID information in the memory PCB assy.
Head ID (24 digits)
<LOCAL.-> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST / PRINT
HEAD ID <ent>
#HEAD ID / --------
-------- --------
If the ID, which has been input, is incorrect, operation
error (ERROR 30) is displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > HEAD WASH
1.0
Rev.
4.2.7 HEAD WASH
Function
Cleans the ink channels inside the head, damper and tube.
When modifying ink type or ink set, empties the ink out of the channel and cleans the inside using the washing liquid.
Procedure
1. Select [HEAD WASH] from the operation menu.
2. During the initial filling after cleaning the head, select Yes if
you change the ink set.
(The ink set can be changed only at the factory shipment,
because change of the coupler is also needed.)
[]: Head wash (normal)
[]: Head wash that accompanies ink-set change.
3. Remove all the ink cartridges and then discharge the ink inside.
Carry out the discharge after the confirmation of display when a
waste ink tank warning occurs.
4. Insert the washing-liquid cartridges into all the slots, clean the
inside of the tube, and then carry out head vibration.
5. Remove all the washing-liquid cartridges and then discharge the
liquid inside.
During the cleaning sequence, the cartridge sensor in the printer monitors the insertion and removal of each
cartridge. When the sensor detects the cartridge specified on the screen (or when the sensor detects no
cartridge), the printer automatically carries out absorbing and discharging operations (The ink suction pump
motor is activated). Note that the washing liquid cartridge will be recognized as normal even when the
cartridge sensor fails to read IC chip information, because the cartridge is not equipped with the IC chip.
As non-filling state remains after the completion of cleaning, the Initial Filling or filling of corresponding
head is required.
<LOCAL.-> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
HEAD WASH <ent>
[FUNCTION]
Do you change an
ink set? NO < > YES
MMCCYYKK
- DISCHARGE -
00:00
12345678
- ABSORPTION -
00:00
Remove:Cartridges
12345678
- DISCHARGE -
00:00
4.2.7 HEAD WASH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6. Clean inside the ink channels using washing liquid one more
time.
7. "Cap OFF is carried out automatically and the print head
carriages move to the maintenance position. Then Wiper ON
is carried out automatically and the wipers are cleaned.
[ENTER]: To the next operation
8. Select the next operation.
[]: To the screen displaying the next operation
selection. (Step 9.)
[]: Filling of the transportation liquid
(Only at the factory shipment)
[]: Additional cleaning (Step 4.)
9. Select the next operation.
[]: Head-wash completed (in this sequence)
[]: Discharge of the maintenance washing liquid
(To the next operation)
10. Remove the maintenance washing liquid cartridges and
discharge the liquid inside.
11. Select [END] to end the operation.
[]: Head-wash completed (in this sequence)
[]: Discharge of the maintenance washing liquid
(Only at the factory shipment)
12345678
- ABSORPTION -
00:00
Remove:Cartridges
12345678
- DISCHARGE -
00:00
Clean a wiper.
COMPLETED :ent
END < >CONTINUE
V Re-WASH
Maint.WashLiquid
END < > DISCHARGE
Remove:Maint.Wash
12345678
- DISCHARGE -
00:00
RANS Liquid
END < >ABSORB
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > HEAD WASH
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > 500mm SQUARE
1.1
Rev.
4.2.8 500mm SQUARE
Function
Adjusts the working distance in the X direction in cutting operation.
Is used to check the distance when the parameter has been initialized, when the position aberration of the feed
direction has occurred during cutting operation, or when plotting cannot be carried out in accordance with the
specified distance.
Procedure
1. Set media, and attach the supplied pen to the cut head carriage.
2. Press [TOOL] with CUT MODE <Local> to set to [PEN].
3. Select [500mm SQUARE] from the operation menu.
4. Plot a square pattern.
[]: Compensation value is cleared.
[]: Pattern drawing
[]: To the screen for compensating
*If there is not enough space for the plotting on the media, Step
6 is displayed and the plotting is not performed.
5. Measure the length of X (feed direction), and work out a
compensation value.
Equation: Measured value (mm) - 500 (mm)
= Compensation value (Input value)
*unit: 0.1 (mm)
500 mm
500 mm
<LOCAL.C> [#01]
CUT ( 30/ 60/ 0.30)
SPD PRS OFS
[PEN] 30 60 0.30
[TOOL]
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST /CUT
500mm SQUARE <ent>
#500mm SQUARE
CLEAR < >DRAW
Pattern drawing
Distance compensation value
500 mm
500 mm
Y (scan direction) can be displayed on LCD, but it
cannot be input.
4.2.8 500mm SQUARE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6. Compare a compensation value gained by an actual
measurement with the one displayed by LCD. If these values
are not the same, enter a compensation value through the
following procedures.
7. Press [ENTER] twice, then press [] to clear the system
parameter values (No.0, 1, 2).
[ENTER]: Back to the previous screen.
[]: Compensation value is cleared.
[]: Pattern drawing
[]: To the screen for compensating
8. Plot a square again, and measure the lengths.
*If there is not enough space for the plotting on the media, Step
6 is displayed and the plotting is not performed.
[]:
[]: Pattern drawing
[]: To the compensation screen
9. Input the compensation value of X (feed direction).
Equation: Measured value (mm) - 500 (mm)
= Compensation value (Input value)
*unit: 0.1 (mm)
[] / []: Modifies the compensation value.
[ENTER]: Finalizes
#500mm SQUARE
dX = 0.0 dY = 0.0
#500mm SQUARE
dX = 0.0 dY = 0.0
#500mm SQUARE
CLEAR < >DRAW
#500mm SQUARE
CLEAR < >DRAW
Pattern drawing
#500mm SQUARE
dX = 0.5 dY = 0.3
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > 500mm SQUARE
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > PEN PRESSURE
1.2
Rev.
4.2.9 PEN PRESSURE
Function
Makes adjustment so that pen (cut) pressure can be controlled as / specified).
The adjusted values are registered as system parameters (No.13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18).
Make the adjustment for the following six values:
0g, 30g, 60g, 100g, 200g, 350g
Procedure
1. Set media, and set the adjustment pen on the cut head carriage.
2. Press [TOOL] with CUT MODE <Local> to set to PEN.
3. Select [PEN PRESSURE] from the operation menu.
4. Input the value when the pen tip comes in close contact with the
media and finalize the entry. (0g adjustment)
[ENTER]: Finalizes (To the next compensation screen)
5. Pull up the adjustment pen with a tension gauge at 30 g, repeat
up and down several times and input the value when the pen tip
starts leaving the sheet. (30g adjustment)
<LOCAL.C> [#01]
CUT ( 30/ 60/ 0.30)
SPD PRS OFS
[PEN] 30 60 0.30
[TOOL]
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST / CUT
PEN PRESSURE <ent>
[FUNCTION]
#PEN PRESSURE
0g =17
Select a little higher value so that the pen tip will be in
close contact with the sheet.
#PEN PRESSURE
30g =25
4.2.9 PEN PRESSURE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6. Carry out each adjustment by up to 350 g following the
methods described above. (60, 100, 200, 350g)
7. Check the pen pressure using the tension gauge as necessary.
[FUNCTION]: Indicates the pen pressure
8. Check the pen pressure (10-350g) at appropriate pressure levels
before completing all the adjustments. (in 2 g steps)
[] / []: Selects a pen pressure level
[END]: Completes
#PEN PRESSURE
60g =25
#PEN PRESSURE
100g =25
#PEN PRESSURE
200g =25
#PEN PRESSURE
350g =25
#PEN PRESSURE
20g=20
#PEN PRESSURE
30g=22
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > PEN PRESSURE
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > LANDING
1.2
Rev.
4.2.10 LANDING
Function
Make this adjustment after completing the pen pressure adjustment.
(Use the following four different adjustment patterns.)
[REMOTE]: Plots 11 square patterns at the positions of different pen landing values in steps of 20, starting at
the first pen landing point.
Plots the square patterns in two rows (near the right end and the center of the media) using the
same set of landing values.
[FUNCTION]: Plots a radial pattern using the pen landing value selected based on the square patterns, four radial
patterns using the pen landing values one to four larger than the selected value, and five radial
patterns using the values one to five smaller. (4 steps)
[]: Plots four square patterns and 32 4-mm straight lines.
[]: Plots a broken line between pinch rollers.
The adjusted values are registered as system parameters (No.7 and 9).
The content of adjustment if as follows:
#LANDING UP POSITION
Pen landing
Cutter landing
Plotted pattern using the pen
landing value corresponding
to the selected square pattern
Pen landing value: +200
Pen landing value: 0
(Current adjustment value)
4.2.10 LANDING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Procedure
1. Set media, and attach the supplied pen to the cut head carriage.
2. Select [LANDING] from the operation menu.
3. Move the pen shaft up or down with the JOG key until the O-
ring comes in contact with the bushing holder.
[] / []: Up or down motion (in steps of 1 press)
4. Press [FUNCTION], and the pen will descend and ascend. At
the up position, check to see that the top surface is in contact
with O-ring.
5. Press [ENTER] to store the setting value and move to [DOWN
LANDING].
6. Select one of the following drawing patterns and draw the
pattern. (Generally, the square at the next step)
[]: Draws a square and straight line.
[]: Draws a broken line.
[FUNCTION]: Draws radial lines consecutively.
[REMOTE]: Draws squares consecutively.
[FEED]: Moves to Cut landing adjustment.
<LOCAL.C> [#01]
CUT ( 30/ 60/ 0.30)
SPD PRS OFS
[CUT1] 30 60 0.30
[TOOL]
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST / CUT
LANDING <ent>
[FUNCTION]
#LANDING
UP POSITION =530
O-ring
If the O-ring is already in contact with the bushing
holder before adjustment, move the pen shaft down
once with the JOG key and then start adjusting the
position.
The pen repeats down and up motion every 20 sec-
onds.
#LANDING
DOWN LANDING =25
R.1.2
1.2
Rev.
4.2.10 LANDING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7. Plots 11 square patterns using different pen landing values in
steps of 20, starting with the currently set pen landing value.
[REMOTE] : Plots square patterns.
[END] : Stops plotting.
8. Input the value corresponding to the square pattern which meets
the following criterion:
Criterion: The first square pattern whose lines are uniform in
thickness found by checking that is to be started from
pen landing value 0.
9. Plot radial patterns to find out the best pen landing value.
Plot 10 radial patterns using the pen landing values from -20 to
+16 based on the pen landing value registered in Step 5.
(4 steps)
[SHEET SET]: Plots radial patterns.
[END]: Stops plotting.
10. Input the value corresponding to the radial pattern which meets
the following criterion.
Criterion: The middle one of the radial patterns whose lines are
uniform in thickness.
11. Register the input value.
[ENTER]: Registers
Center of media
Near the right edge of media
DOWN LANDING=35
Square pattern which is plotted clearly
(Pen landing value: 20)
Pattern corresponding to the pen
landing value selected in Step 6
Radial pattern plotted
clearly.
(Pen landing value:37)
DOWN LANDING =10
DOWN LANDING =10
If a satisfactory pattern cannot be obtained only by
pen landing adjustment, change the end pressure
value and pen up value.
(After changing the values, be sure to perform pen
landing adjustment again.)
Adjust the up landing and the end press by clicking
[USER TYPE / TOOL].
R.1.2
1.2
Rev.
4.2.10 LANDING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cutter landing adjustment procedure
1. Select [$PEN LANDING].
The LCD indicates the present pen landing value and the pen
moves up and down repeatedly.
[CLEANING/FEED]: Selects
2. Select [CUT LANDING].
The LCD indicates the present cut landing value and the pen
moves up and down repeatedly.
[CLEANING/FEED]: Selects
3. Register the input value.
[ENTER]: Registers
#LANDING / CUT
DOWN LANDING =25
Basically, the value of pen landing and cut landing can
be the same.
An adjusted value of pen landing is automatically
reflected in a cut landing value in the CJV series.
If a value of cut landing is modified independently,
such a modification is not reflected in the value of pen
landing.
R.1.1
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > [PHOTO SENSOR] SENSOR LV.
1.2
Rev.
4.2.11 [PHOTO SENSOR] SENSOR LV.
Function
Carries out automatic compensation of output value so that the mark sensor on the cut head carriage can perform read
operation correctly.
This operation is carried out in the case where the read operation by the mark sensor is unworkable.
(User menu also has the same function.)
Procedure
1. Set media mentioned above directly below the mark sensor, and
set the media clamp to HIGH.
2. Select [#PHOTO SENSOR] from the operation menu.
3. Select the [SENSOR LV.] and press [ENTER].
[] / []: Changes items
4. Register an optimum value (automatically displayed).
CJV30 will automatically select an optimum value.
Therefore, wait until the display shows a fixed value and then
enter the value.
[ENTER]: Registers
The registration mark detection can not be achieved correctly under such conditions that there is any
print or stain in the area scanned by the sensor. To avoid such problem, use unprinted or unstained white
paper under the sensor.
Set the media used, or lay and set three sheets of copy paper on top of another.
Set unstained white paper (as specified above).
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST /CUT
PHOTO SENSOR <ent>
#PHOTO SENSOR
SENSOR LV.
POSITION
#PHOTO SENS./ LV.
OUT: 0070 IN: 0780
The display may not become so steady that it keeps
showing only one fixed number. In that case, press
the [ENTER] key when the value of the high-order
digit on the display is fixed.
Pressing [FUNCTION] will release the heads from
the drive.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > [PHOTO SENSOR] POSITION
1.1
Rev.
4.2.12 [PHOTO SENSOR] POSITION
Function
Correct the mechanical misalignment between the pen tip and the mark sensor by automatic compensation.
Checks the position when the parameter has been initialized or the misalignment occurs during cutting operation with
the mark sensor being activated.
Procedure
1. Set media, and attach the pen to the cut head carriage.
2. Press [TOOL] with CUT MODE <Local> to set to PEN.
3. Select [PHOTO SENSOR] from the operation menu.
4. Select the POSITION and press [ENTER].
5. Carry out plotting of the pattern by pressing [ENTER]. If the
pen tip is not in alignment with the sensor, the plotter plots the
adjustment pattern again.
6. Check the compensation value.
[ENTER]: Checks.
Perform this adjustment after the completion of adjusting the location of mark sensor and adjusting the
sensitivity of mark sensor.
Do not use commercially available pens other than the specified ones.
Since the pen tip is not aligned with the center of the pen holder, adjustment is not made correctly.
Do not use the attached pen adapter (M601251).
To perform this adjustment, use the dedicated pen holder (M006474).
<LOCAL.C> [#01]
CUT1 (30/60/0.30)
SPD PRS OFS
[CUT1] 30 60 0.30
[TOOL]
When no media is set: the plotter waits for input of a
compensation value without plotting.
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST / CUT
PHOTO SENSOR <ent>
[FUNCTION]
#PHOTO SENSOR
POSITION
SENSOR LV.
#PHOTOsens./POSITION
START :ent
Plotting & Automatic
compensation Readjust SENSOR LV (4.2.11) if read operation by
mark sensor fails.
X = 0.0 Y = 0.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > GR/PR POSITION
1.1
Rev.
4.2.13 GR/PR POSITION
Outline
Makes the printer recognize the positional relation between the grid roller and the pinch roller.
Readjusts the position of grind roller and the pinch roller when the parameter has been initialized or when an error
occurs even if the position of the pinch roller is within an acceptable range upon media detection, and compensates
mechanical errors.
Procedure
1. Select [GR/PR POSITION] from the operation menu.
2. Check the location of the cutter, and if it is not in the parking
position, move it to that position.
(If it has been parked in that position already, proceed to the
next screen.)
[ENTER]: Cutter moves to the parking position.
3. Hold up the clamp lever.
(If it has been held up already, proceed to the next screen.)
4. Align the both right ends of the rightmost pinch roller and the
rightmost grid roller, and hold the lever down.
(Margin of error: within 0.5 mm)
[] / []:
5. Carry out automatic compensation by clicking [ENTER].
After the automatic compensation is completed, return to main
menu by clicking [END].
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST / CUT
GR/PR POSITION <ent>
#GR/PR POSITION
Head Cut Retruct:ent
LEVER UP
SET:PR POSITION
LEVER DOWN
#GR/PR POSITION
ACTION :ent
- failure -
* When the automatic correction failed
In case automatic compensation fails, a screen for Step
3 is displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > MOTOR CURRENT
1.1
Rev.
Function
If hunting occurs or a hunting noise is heard when the X-axis motor and/or Y-axis motor are driven after replacing the
main PCB assy, adjust the supply current to minimize the hunting.
Carries out the supply current adjustment while the cutter head is connected. The adjusted value is stored in the
control system parameters.
Adjustment items are as follows.
STOP ADJUST : Adjustment during the resting state
X MOVING ADJUT : Adjustment during the X motor is being activated.
Y MOVING ADJUT : Adjustment during the Y motor is being activated.
Procedures for STOP ADJUST
1. Select [MOTOR CURRENT] from the operation menu.
2. Carry out the [STOP ADJUST] and adjust the current value so
that the hunting noises at the X and Y-axis motors are as mini-
mized as possible.
[] / []: Motor changeover
[] / []: Modification of D/A value
[ENTER]: Executes
[END]: Returns
Procedures for X MOVING ADJUT
1. Select [MOTOR CURRENT] -> [X MOVING ADJUT] from
the operation menu.
2. Input the following test conditions and execute the function.
Speed (S): 5 to 10 mm/s
Acceleration (A): 0.2 G
Length (X): About 50 to 100 mm
3. Adjust the value so that the hunting sound during the X motor
running is minimized.
Check the hunting sound of the X motor at rear left.
4. Press [END] several times to complete the X-axis motor current
adjustment.
[] / []: Changes the value
[] / []: Moves
[ENTER]: Executes
[END]: Returns
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
MOTOR CURRENT <ent>
#MOTOR CURRENT
STOP ADJUST <ent>
X = 140 Y = 140
( 0 ) ( 0 )
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
MOTOR CURRENT <ent>
#MOTOR CURRENT
X MOVING ADJUT <ent>
#X MOVING ADJUT
S= 10 A=0.10 X=100
X-axis continuous drive
(X-axis motor drive)
#X MOVING ADJUT
140 ( 0 )
(No caps taken off)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Procedures for Y MOVING ADJUT
1. Select [MOTOR CURRENT] -> [Y MOVING ADJUT] from
the operation menu.
2. Input the following test conditions and execute the function.
Speed (S): 5 to 10 mm/s
Acceleration (A): 1.0 G
Length (X): About 50 to 100 mm
3. Adjust the value so that the hunting sound during the Y motor
running is minimized.
Check the hunting sound of the Y motor at right side.
4. Press [END] several times to complete the Y-axis motor current
adjustment.
[] / []: Changes the value
[] / []: Moves
[ENTER]: Executes
[END]: Returns
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
MOTOR CURRENT <ent>
#MOTOR CURRENT
Y MOVING ADJUT <ent>
#Y MOVING ADJUT
S=50 A=0.10 X=100
Y-axis continuous drive
(Y-axis motor drive)
#Y MOVING ADJUT
140 ( 0 )
(Carriage out)
To check the hunting sound, return to LOCAL mode
by pressing [END] and operate a JOG key.
Hunting noise remains on rare occasions after adjust-
ment.
Follow procedures below to rough identification of X-
axis with hunting noise and review the adjusted value.
1 In LOCAL, press [] [] [] [] KEY to
change to the origin setting mode.
2 Confirm X-axis hunting noise in origin setting
mode.
Press [] [] KEY for several times in turn.
If hunting noise continues after motor is stop,
adjustment value is not set properly.
Perform [X MOVING ADJUST] to re-adjust the
current value.
3 Confirm Y-axis hunting noise in origin setting
mode.
Press [] []KEY for several times in turn.
If hunting noise continues after motor is stop,
adjustment value is not set properly.
Perform [Y MOVING ADJUST] to re-adjust the
current value.
Standard current set value is 125-150.
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > MOTOR CURRENT
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > PRINT/CUT POS.
1.1
Rev.
4.2.15 PRINT/CUT POS.
Outline
Correct the mechanical position aberration of the print head and the nozzle, and raise the precision of printing and
cutting while the mark sensor is not used.
The machine draws registration marks with the print head and cut head, reads the positions of the marks with the
mark sensor and corrects the position error automatically.
Procedure
1. Select [PRINT/CUT POS.] from the operation menu.
2. Set the origin at the distance of 40 mm or more from the inner
edge of the rightmost pinch roller and press [ENTER].
3. Press [ENTER] to start the adjustment.
The correction values are determined from the positional
difference between the mark , which is drawn at the corner of
, and the mark .
4. Check the correction values on the LCD and then press
[ENTER] to register correction values and complete the
adjustment.
X correction value
Y correction
value
Print pattern
(One side: 1 inch long)
Drawing pattern with pen
(One side: 1/2 inch long)
Drawing pattern with pen
(One side: 1 inch long)
* The marks and are drawn with the
pen to visually check the correction value.
The correction value can be set even
without the drawing with the pen tool.
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
PRINT/CUT POS. <ent>
Before starting the adjustment, check to see that the
connection unit is connected to the printing head.
40 mm or more
(When EXPANDS = ON)
40 mm or more
PRINT/CUT POS.
ORIGIN SET :ent
When EXPANDS is set to ON, set the origin 40 mm or
more away from the outer edge of the pinch roller.
The adjustment is not made precisely unless the
origin is set properly.
#PRINT/CUT POS. /CUT
PRINT START :ent
PRINTING
Mark drawn
(Print Head)
Switching to cutter head
Mark drawn
(Cut Head)
Position of mark detected
Mark drawn and correction
values calculated (Cut Head)
#PRINT/CUT POS. /CUT
Y= 0.0 X= 0.0
If a mark detection error occurs, execute 4.2.11
[PHOTO SENSOR] SENSOR LV. and perform this
adjustment again.
Pressing [END] will terminate the adjustment without
registering the correction values.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > SERIAL No.
1.0
Rev.
4.2.16 SERIAL No.
Function
Confirms and sets the serial number. 8 characters of alphabet and numeral (0-9, A-Z) can be input.
Because the serial number is input before shipment, field entry is impossible. Reenter the parameter only if it has
been initialized.
Procedure
1. Select [SERIAL No.] from the operation menu.
2. Enter (Confirm) the serial number.
[] / []: Change the numerals.
[] / []: Moves the cursor.
(When the cursor is in the left or the right end,
key input does not work.)
[ENTER]: Finalizes
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
SERIAL No. <ent>
[FUNCTION]
#SERIAL No.
00000000
If the serial number has been set, it cannot be changed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > DEALER No.
1.0
Rev.
4.2.17 DEALER No.
Function
Confirms and sets the dealer number. 8 characters of alphabet and numeral (0-9, A-Z) can be input.
Procedure
1. Select [DEALER No.] from the operation menu.
2. Enter (Confirm) the dealer number.
[] / []: Change the numerals.
[] / []: Moves the cursor.
(When the cursor is in the left or the right end,
key input does not work.)
[ENTER]: Finalizes
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
DEALER No. <ent>
[FUNCTION]
#DEALER No.
00000000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > DEFAULT SET
1.0
Rev.
4.2.18 DEFAULT SET
Function
Sets the selected parameters to the initial values.
Procedure
1. Select [DEFAULT SET] from the operation menu.
2. Select items to be initialized.
[] / []: Switches the parameter item display.
[ENTER]: Finalizes
3. Initialize the selected parameter.
[ENTER]: Executes the initialization.
No. Item Operation Remarks
1 SETUP PARAMETER 1. Initialize the user operation setting value.
2. Sets user No. to 1.
3. Initialize the language to be used.
4. Initialize the user dot position compensation value.
5. Sets to maintenance close.
Always selectable
2 MAINTENANCEparameter Initialize the parameter in question.
3 CUSTOMIZE PARAMETER Initialize the parameter in question.
4 RUNNING PARAMETER Initialize the parameter in question.
5 EXCHANGE PARAMETER Initialize the parameter in question.
6 INK-SYSTEM PARAMETER Initialize the parameter in question.
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
DEFAULT SET <ent>
[FUNCTION]
#DEFAULT SET
SETUP PARAMETER <ent>
MAINTE PARAM. <ent>
CUSTOM PARAM. <ent>
:
SETUP PARAMETER
INITIALIZE OK? :ent
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > REPLACE PARTS
1.1
Rev.
4.2.19 REPLACE PARTS
Function
Displays the replacement history of the following parts/unit or registers replacement date thereof.
Parts subject to the replacement
Registration procedure
1. Select [REPLACE PARTS] from the operation menu.
2. Select [REGISTRATION].
[ENTER]: Finalizes (To the next screen.)
3. Select the parts replaced and register the date and the part
number referring to the list shown above.
[] / []: Switches the names of parts.
[ENTER]: Finalizes (To the next screen.)
Example of displaying the part-replacement history
To see the part-replacement history, select [HISTORY] in Step
2 and make the appropriate part displayed.
[] / []: Switches the display of the parts.
In this machine, the timing for replacement of parts is determined based on this item.
When a part in question is replaced, never forget to register the replacement date.
Type Part number
PUMP Enter the date only. (Do not input the number.)
CAP Enter the date only. (Do not input the number.)
DUMPER Registration of A to H (nozzle number)
Print Head *As for a head, since the replacement date is automatically recorded at start-up after replacement, the
registration is not required. (Confirmation of history is possible.)
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
REPLACE PARTS <ent>
[FUNCTION]
#REPLACE PARTS
REGISTRATION <ent>
HISTORY <ent>
#REPLACE PARTS
PARTS :PUMP
:CAP
:DUMPER
-PUMP
00.00.?? : No.1
-HEAD
[ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2
The position of the damper and the print head
(Top view of head)
A
Designate with nozzle row (A to H)
B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment
4. Adjustment Items
4.1
Operation Matrix
4.2
Adjustment Function
4.3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment > Adjusting the Location of Mark Sensor
1.1
Rev.
4.3.1 Adjusting the Location of Mark Sensor
Function
Adjust the distance between the mark sensor (photo sensor) and the platen to the specified value.
Procedure
1. From the back side of the printer, loosen the screws that hold
the T sensor BKT.
2. Insert the clearance gauge between the pen line film and the
bottom surface of the T sensor cover.
3. Check whether the right and left T sensor covers are fixed under
the conditions that each of them is in close contact with the
clearance gauge, then tighten up the screws.
Set the pressure of all the clamps to Middle, and make the adjustment on the right station side.
This adjustment is to be made mechanically without using any [#ADJUST] item. After completion of
this adjustment, however, make the adjustments of [PHOTO SENSOR] among the [#ADJUST] items.
2.8 mm
T Sensor BKT
Loosen
When no sheet is set: the plotter waits for input of a
compensation value without plotting.
Jig for adjusting the height
of CJV mark sensor
T Sensor Cover
Fix.
Press against.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment > Adjustment of the Mounting Location for the Cutter
1.1
Rev.
4.3.2 Adjustment of the Mounting Location for the Cutter
Function
Adjust the cutter location in the back-and-forth direction by moving the cutter unit back and forth while visually
checking the location.
Procedure
1. Loosen the screws shown in the diagram to the degree whereby
the cutter unit can be held loosely.
2. Push down the clamp lever.
3. Push down the cutter blade and adjust the back-and-forth loca-
tion of the unit so that the tip of the cutter blade is located in the
middle of the groove. Then tighten the loosened screws.
4. Move the head unit manually and push down the cutter blade
assy at each right, center and left end on the platen, to check
back-front positioning.
Locate the tip of cutter blade
in the middle of groove
Loosen
Cutter Unit
Be sure to make the adjustment while the clamp
lever is lowered.
Hold this
down.
Tighten screws after back-
and-forth adjustment
Check each of three locations.
On rare occasions, the blade comes out of the slot
because of assembly errors or fluctuation in part
accuracies. In such a case, adjust again to the back-
front optimum position where the blade is always in
whole slot on the platen.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment > Adjustment of the Station Height
1.0
Rev.
4.3.3 Adjustment of the Station Height
Outline
Procedure
1. Loosen the two screws used for station-base adjustment.
2. Loosen the hexagon socket head screws and make an adjustment
to set their thickness gauge at 5 mm, then tighten the nuts.
3. Tighten up two loosened screws used for station-base adjustment
and fix them at 5 mm in thickness gauge.
Loosen
5 mm
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment > Adjustment of the Wiper Height
1.0
Rev.
4.3.4 Adjustment of the Wiper Height
Outline
Procedure
1. Loosen the wiper height adjusting screws (x2), and temporarily
adjust the screws until the thickness gauge is 8mm.
2. Loosen the screws (x2) on the head cover front, and then tighten
the screws while holding the height adjustment lever in the lowest
position to fix the head in place.
3. Move the head, and adjust the wiper so that there is approximately
1.5 mm from the nozzle surface.
W-BKT spacer
8

m
m
1.5 mm
Nozzle surface
Wiper
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment > Positioning of the Encoder Sensor
1.0
Rev.
4.3.5 Positioning of the Encoder Sensor
Function
Procedure
1. Loosen the screws on the L sensor BKT.
Refer to 6.5.12 Encoder PCB Assy for details concerning its
assembly and disassembly.
2. Adjust the height of the encoder PCB assy and fix it with
screws.
3. Check the following two items when moving the print head carriage
manually from the right end to the left end on the main body.
The upper part of the linear encoder scale is not in touch
with the L sensor.
The exposed lens of the L sensor is not over the height of the
linear encoder scale.
NG
The linear encoder scale
must not be in touch with
the L sensor.
The linear encoder scale must
be positioned so that the lens of
the L sensor is hidden by it.
After fixing the L sensor BKT, check whether no
abnormality is found by conducting the following
[#TEST].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment > Centering of the Roll Holder
1.0
Rev.
4.3.6 Centering of the Roll Holder
Outline
Carry out centering so that the axes of roller holder (axis of both feeding side and take-up side) are aligned, by
positioning them face-to-face.
Adjustment procedure
1. Carry out centering so that the axes of roller holder are aligned by
positioning the feeding side and the take-up side face-to-face.
2. In case their axes are not aligned, make adjustment after loosening
the screws of the bushing.
3. After the both axes have been aligned, tighten up screws and check
for any misalignment of axis at the right, left and central part of
the main body.
Bad example: The axes of the right or left side of the
roller holder are out of alignment.
Good example: The axes of the roller holder
are in alignment.
Loosen
Loosen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment > Positioning of the Wiper Drive Link
1.0
Rev.
4.3.7 Positioning of the Wiper Drive Link
Outline
Procedure
1. After setting the clearance between the motor base and the wiper
drive link at 0.5 mm, check whether the wiper moves smoothly.
Wiper Drive Link
0.5 mm
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function
5. Test Items
5.1
Test Function
5.2
Other Test
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.3
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [CHECK PATTERN] PATTERN
1.3
Rev.
5.1.1 [CHECK PATTERN] PATTERN
Operation Procedures
Step Item Description
1 Density selection ALL, 100%, 50%, 25%, 12.5%, 6.25%
2 Resolution selection 360x360, 540x720, 540x900, 540x1080, 720x540, 720x720, 720x1080, 720x1440, 1440x1440
3 Scan direction selection Bi-D, Uni-D
4 Pass No. selection Resolution Passes (4-color) Passes (6-color/6-color+W/7-color/8-color)
360x360: 1, 2, 4, 8 2, 4, 8, 16
540x720: 2, 4, 8, 16 4, 8, 16, 32
540x900: 5, 10, 20, 40 5, 10, 20, 40
540x1080: 3, 6, 12, 24 6, 12, 24, 48
720x540: 3, 6, 12, 24 3, 6, 12, 24
720x720: 2, 4, 8, 16 4, 8, 16, 32
720x1080: 3, 6, 12, 24 6, 12, 24, 48
720x1440: 4, 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32, 64
1440x1440: 8, 16, 32 16, 32, 64
5 Drawing size selection X size: 10mm media length (unit: 10 mm) * Roll paper: 500000 mm
Y size: 10mm media width (unit: 10 mm)
6 Drawing color selection 4 colors: M, C, Y, K (M, B, Y, K with Sb51, Sb52 ink)
6 colors: M, C, Y, K, c, m (M, B, Y, K, b, m with Sb51, Sb52 ink)
6 colors+White: M,C,Y,K, c, m, W, W
7 colors:M, k, C, k, Y, m, K, c
8 colors:M, S, C, W, Y, m, K, c
7 Start of drawing
(Waiting for key input)
[ENTER]: Starts drawing.
[TEST]: Executes test drawing.
[(JOG)]: Sets JOG operation mode.
(Press [ENTER] to start drawing with the current position as the origin.)
[REMOTE]: Switches between high speed scanning ON and OFF.
[END]: Completes drawing.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.3
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [CHECK PATTERN] COLOR CHART
1.3
Rev.
5.1.2 [CHECK PATTERN] COLOR CHART
1 Density selection ALL, 100%, 50%, 25%, 12.5%, 6.25%
2 Resolution selection 360x360, 540x720, 540x900, 540x1080, 720x540, 720x720, 720x1080, 720x1440, 1440x1440
360x360: 1, 2, 4, 8 2, 4, 8, 16
540x720: 2, 4, 8, 16 4, 8, 16, 32
540x900: 5, 10, 20, 40 5, 10, 20, 40
540x1080: 3, 6, 12, 24 6, 12, 24, 48
720x540: 3, 6, 12, 24 3, 6, 12, 24
720x720: 2, 4, 8, 16 4, 8, 16, 32
720x1080: 3, 6, 12, 24 6, 12, 24, 48
720x1440: 4, 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32, 64
1440x1440: 8, 16, 32 16, 32, 64
6 Start of drawing
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [CHECK PATTERN] DROP.POS CHK
1.2
Rev.
5.1.3 [CHECK PATTERN] DROP.POS CHK
Drawing pattern
F
e
e
d
Scan
<Example of DROP.POS CHK pattern printing>
1 Resolution selection 540x720, 540x900, 540x1080, 720x540, 720x720, 720x1080, 720x1440, 1440x1440
540x720: 2, 4, 8, 16 4, 8, 16, 32
540x900: 5, 10, 20, 40 5, 10, 20, 40
540x1080: 3, 6, 12, 24 6, 12, 24, 48
720x540: 3, 6, 12, 24 3, 6, 12, 24
720x720: 2, 4, 8, 16 4, 8, 16, 32
720x1080: 3, 6, 12, 24 6, 12, 24, 48
720x1440: 4, 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32, 64
1440x1440: 8, 16, 32 16, 32, 64
5 Start of drawing
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > ALL PATTERN
1.0
Rev.
5.1.4 ALL PATTERN
Function
The following check patterns are drawn in the block.
Check pattern Reference page
Slant adjusting pattern
Y-impact position adjusting pattern (DRAFT to FINE, FINE2:Four patterns in total)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [MOTOR TEST] X SERVO MOTOR
1.2
Rev.
5.1.5 [MOTOR TEST] X SERVO MOTOR
Function
Operation test of X-axis motor is executed.
Step Item Description Remarks
1 Speed designation [], []: Selects speed.
Set value: 1 500 mm/s (unit: 1 mm/s)
[], []:
Selection of item 2 4
2 Acceleration designation [], []: Selects acceleration.
Set value: 0.01 2.00 G (unit: 0.01 G)
3 Moving amount designation [], []: Selects moving amount.
Set value: 1 mm media length (width) (unit: 1 mm)
When media is not detected: 1 mm Mechanical
limit size
4 Test start [ENTER]: Repeats reciprocating motion in the X direction
with designated conditions.
5 End [END]: Returns to the motion starting position and
executes capping to end the test.
During the test, heater temperature control is allowed. (When [HEATER] key is effective)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [MOTOR TEST] Y SERVO MOTOR
1.1
Rev.
5.1.6 [MOTOR TEST] Y SERVO MOTOR
Function
Operation test of Y-axis motor is executed.
1 Speed designation [], []: Selects speed.
[], []:
2 Acceleration designation [], []: Selects acceleration.
Set value: 0.05 2.00 G (unit: 0.05 G)
3 Moving amount designation [], []: Selects moving amount.
Set value: 1 mm media length (width) (unit: 1 mm)
4 Cap OFF (Only after media
detection)
5 Test start [ENTER]: Repeats reciprocating motion in the Y direction
with designated conditions.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [MOTOR TEST] XY SERVO MOTOR
1.2
Rev.
5.1.7 [MOTOR TEST] XY SERVO MOTOR
Function
Operation test of XY-axis motor is executed.
1 X speed designation [], []: Selects speed.
[], []:
[ENTER]:
Transits to the Y direction
setting (5 ).
2 X acceleration designation [], []: Selects acceleration.
Set value: 0.01 2.00 G (unit: 0.01 G)
3 X moving amount
designation
[], []: Selects moving amount.
Set value: 1 mm media length (unit: 1 mm)
limit size
Press [ENTER] to start Y-axis motor setting.
4 Y speed designation [], []: Selects speed.
[], []:
[ENTER]:
Transits to the following
step.
[END]:Transits to the X
direction setting (2 ).
5 Y acceleration designation [], []: Selects acceleration.
Set value: 0.05 2.00 G (unit: 0.05 G)
6 Y moving amount
designation
[], []: Selects moving amount.
Set value: 1 mm media width (unit: 1 mm)
limit size
7 Cap OFF Only after media detection
8 Test start [ENTER]: Repeats the following motion with the designated
conditions.
(During the motion, No. of Y reciprocation is
displayed.)
a) Moves by Y designated distance.
b) Moves by X designated distance, and moves to Y
starting position.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [MOTOR TEST] WIPER MOTOR
1.0
Rev.
5.1.8 [MOTOR TEST] WIPER MOTOR
Function
Operation test of wiper motor is executed.
1 Driving speed designation [], []: Selects driving speed of the motor.
Set value: 100 4000 pps (unit: 100 pps)
[], []:
2 WAIT designation [], []: Designates operation interval.
Set value: 0 60 sec. (unit: 1 sec.)
3 Count designation [], []: Designates No. of operation.
Set value: CONTINUE, 1 1000 count (unit: 1 count)
4 Test start [ENTER]: Drives the motor with designated conditions.
When CONTINUE is selected in count setting,
press [END] to finish the test.
5 End Return the wiper to the original position.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [MOTOR TEST] PUMP MOTOR
1.0
Rev.
5.1.9 [MOTOR TEST] PUMP MOTOR
Function
Operation test of pump motor is executed.
1 Pump selection [], []: Selects pump by moving the cursor.
[], []: Selects operation.
[], []:
Selection of item 13
2 Rotation direction
designation
[], []: Selects pump rotation direction.
Set value: FORWARD, REVERSE
3 Driving speed designation [], []: Selects driving speed.
Set value: 1004000pps (unit: 100pps)
4 Carriage/Motor state
selection
[FUNCTION]:Carriage/motor state at test selection menu is
displayed.
<Carriage> IN: Executes at cap position.
OUT: Executes after carriage out.
<MOTOR> ON: Executes with Y-axis motor ON.
OFF: Executes with Y-axis motor OFF.
5 Test start [ENTER]: Removes the cap and moves the carriage to
maintenance position. Drives the pump motor with
designated conditions.
[END]: Ends the test.
During operation, open/
close the cartridge valve
with [FUNCTION].
6 End Test is completed.
Note that executing (FORWARD) while the cap is on causes vacuum suction.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [MOTOR TEST] TAKE-UP MOTOR
1.0
Rev.
5.1.10 [MOTOR TEST] TAKE-UP MOTOR
Function
Operation test of take-up motor is executed.
1 Test start [ENTER]: Drives take-up motor.
(SW of winding device enables switching of winding direction or
operation stop)
2 Test end [END]: Completes the test.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [HEATER TEST] TEMPERATURE
1.0
Rev.
5.1.11 [HEATER TEST] TEMPERATURE
Function
Temperature tests of the media heater are executed.
1 Temperature setting Sets temperature of Pre, Print, and After Heater to control the heater.
Set value (Celsius): OFF, 20 50 C (unit: 1C)
Set value (Fahrenheit): OFF, 68 122 F
(as converted from Celsius, unit is not F)
2 Temperature display [ENTER]: Returns to temperature setting.
Temperature is displayed with a unit selected in the [UNIT SETUP] of the [MACHINE SETUP] function.
A/D conversion value is also displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [HEATER TEST] SSR
1.0
Rev.
5.1.12 [HEATER TEST] SSR
Function
ON/OFF test of heater is executed.
1 ON/OFF setting Designates ON/OFF of Pre, Print and After Heater. Temperature is not controlled.
2 ON/OFF display [FUNCTION]:Returns to setting screen.
Temperature is displayed with a unit selected in the [UNIT SETUP] of the [MACHINE SETUP] function.
A/D conversion value is also displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > ACTION TEST
1.0
Rev.
5.1.13 ACTION TEST
Function
Checks the operation of movable parts alone of the unit printer.
List of test items
Item Description
VACUUM FAN Description: Operation test of vacuum fan motor.
Set value: L.L, LOW, MID, HIGH, OFF
Y-CUTTER Description: Operation test of media cutter.
Set value: UP, DOWN
[FUNCTION]: Sets operation interval of Y-cutter.
[], []: Sets operation interval.
Set value: 0 7200 sec. (unit: 1 sec)
[ENTER]: Repeats UP and Down at the set interval.
Number count is displayed during the execution.
LED POINTER Description: Operation test of LED pointer.
Set value: ON, OFF
HDC FAN Description: Operation test of HDC fan.
Set value: ON, OFF
DRY FAN &
DEOD. FAN
Description: Optional operation test of dry/exhaust fan motor. (option)
Set value: ON, OFF
PR SOLENOID Description: The operation test of the solenoid that operates the clamp pressure changeover lever.
Set value: ON, OFF
(Carry out the test by connecting the cutter unit to connection unit. When the menu is
initiated, the connection unit connects with the print head. Therefore, manually connect the
cutter head with connection unit before starting the test.)
P.HEAD SOLENOID Description: The operation test of the solenoid that retains the print head at the cap position.
Set value: ON,OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > SENSOR TEST
1.0
Rev.
5.1.14 SENSOR TEST
Purpose
To check if the each sensor of the instruments printer functions normally.
Function
Various sensors are tested. Before starting the test, the servomotor and stepping motor are turned off. After finishing
the test, initial movement of original position detection is executed.
List of sensor test
No. Item Description LCD display
1 SET LEVER State display of clamp lever sensor ON/OFF
2 R.PAPER State display of rear paper sensor ON/OFF
3 Y-ORIGIN State display of Y origin sensor ON/OFF
4 WIPER State display of wiper sensor ON/OFF
5 HEAD HEIGHT State display of head height sensor ON/OFF
6 PR SENSOR Detects the position of the pinch roller. ON/OFF
7 CUT HEAD JOINT Checks the connection between the cut head carriage and connection unit. ON/OFF
8 Main PCB ID Judges the main PCB ID dedicated to CJV. 800 or more
9 Head Voltage Measures the head voltage. If it is less than 800, there is a possibility of the
malfunction of the head, leading to lowered voltage or fuse blowout.
800 or more
The condition of all the sensors is displayed on the screen by depressing [FUNCTION] during the time
when the sensor test is selected.
(It is possible to display this screen by changing over any other screens.)
R.PAPER
(Paper Sensor)
SET LEVER
(Clamp Sensor)
Y-ORIGIN
(Y-origin Sensor)
HEAD HEIGHT
(Head Height Sensor)
WIPER
(Wiper Origin Sensor)
PR SENSOR
CUT HEAD JOINT
(Joint Sensor)
L=o P=o Y=x W=x C=o
H=o PR=x CJ=x
Displayed in order of sensor test menu. ON=o. OFF=x
L: SET LEVER P: R.PAPER Y: Y-ORIGIN W: WIPER
H: HEAD HEIGHT PR: PR SENSOR CJ: CUT HEAD JOINT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > OPTION
1.0
Rev.
5.1.15 OPTION
Function
Connection of all optional devices is checked.
OFF is displayed when not connected, and ON is displayed when the respective device is connected in the
correct location.
List of options
LCD display Options
REEL Take-up device
EXH. Exhaust fan
DRY Dry fan
Since the shape of all the connectors is the same, they can be connected to any optional devices.
However, if they are connected to the wrong devices, the devices will not work.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > KEYBOARD LED
1.0
Rev.
5.1.16 KEYBOARD LED
Function
ON/OFF test of the keyboard LEDs is executed.
The LEDs are controlled according to the ON/OFF designation.
List of LEDs
LED Kinds
HEAT LED Pre, Print, and After heat LEDs, Constant LED
PRINT MODE Print mode LED
CUT MODE Cut mode LED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > KEYBOARD TEST
1.0
Rev.
5.1.17 KEYBOARD TEST
Function
Panel SW is tested.
When a panel SW is pressed, name of the SW is displayed on LCD.
When no key is pressed, NONE is displayed.
When [END] is pressed, END TEST is displayed and the keyboard test ends.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > LCD TEST
1.0
Rev.
5.1.18 LCD TEST
Function
Characters are displayed on LCD.
When the LCD Test is started, scrolling of character code of 0x21 0xFF in one line is repeated.
The test is completed by pressing [END].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > TIMER CHECK
1.0
Rev.
5.1.19 TIMER CHECK
Function
Date and time of the device are confirmed or set.
Past date/time to be input is allowed max. 8 hours back from present time.
Inputting of other date/time becomes an error.
*Machine setting R Same as the time setting
Set value :20YY.MM.DD HH:MM:00
YY : 00 50
MM : 01 12
DD : 01 31
HH : 00 23
MM : 00 59
Returning to the last setting is allowed by pressing [FUNCTION] in the Date, Time Display State (not the Entering
State). (However, the time elapsed after the setting change is added.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > MEMORY CHECK
1.0
Rev.
5.1.20 MEMORY CHECK
Function
Variety of memory of the device is checked.
The memory check requires the following time. (1 count)
MAIN.SDRAM : Approx. 12 min.
MAIN.F-ROM : 1 Sec.
HEAD.EEPROM : Approx. 22 sec.
32M SDRAM : Approx. 120 sec.
List of memory checks
Note: No. of counts is displayed during the check.
*1: When data does not agree, the check process is discontinued and memory address, write/read data at occurrence of the error
are displayed.
*2: As sector 1 10 used by parameter are passed, SUM value is not 0.
Item Description
MAIN.SDRAM*
1
Read/Write check of SDRAM
Select insert/not insert of wait time (30sec) between write and read of the data.
In the checking, the following process is counted as 1 and is repeated until [END] is input.
1. Write 00000000h onto all area of SDRAM starting from address 0.
2. Read vacant data starting from address 0 to all area of SDRAM sequentially to confirm that the
readings meet the writing data.
3. Write FFFFFFFFh onto all area of SDRAM starting from address 0.
4. Read vacant data from address 0 to all area of SDRAM sequentially to confirm that the readings
meet the writing data.
5. Write increment data of 00010203h, 04050607h, ... FCFDFE00h onto all area of SDRAM starting
from address 0.
MAIN.F-ROM Hash check of F-ROM.
In the checking, confirm that long ward size SUM value from address 0 of F-ROM is 0001f000H*
2
,
that is counted as 1, and repeat the process until [END] is input.
If the SUM value is not 0001f000H, the check process is discontinued and an error is displayed.
HEAD.EEPROM*
1
Read/Write check of HEAD.EEPROM
Select a head unit to be checked.
Before starting the checking, save contents of EEPROM in S-RAM (head unit parameter area).
1. Write 00h onto HEAD.EEPROM starting from address 0 to confirm that read value is 00h
2. Write FFh onto HEAD.EEPROM starting from address 0 to confirm that read value is FFh.
3. Write increment data of 00h, 01h, 02h, ..., FDh, FEh, 00h, ... onto HEAD.EEPROM starting
address 0 to confirm that read value agrees.
32M SDRAM Checking the write/read of SDRAM for receiving the cut data.
Select insert/not insert of wait time (30sec) between write and read of the data.
1. Write 00000000h onto all area of SDRAM starting from address 0.
2. Read vacant data starting from address 0 to all area of SDRAM sequentially to confirm that the
readings meet the writing data.
3. Write FFFFFFFFh onto all area of SDRAM starting from address 0.
5. Write increment data of 00010203h, 04050607h, ... FCFDFE00h onto all area of SDRAM starting
from address 0.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > SKEW CHECK
1.0
Rev.
5.1.21 SKEW CHECK
Function
Skewing of media is checked.
When media is not detected, an OPERATION ERROR (ERROR30) is displayed.
Feed distance is designated to execute feeding.
Feed distance: 1500 m (unit: 1 m)
During the feeding, remaining of feed distance is displayed with unit of 10 mm.
[END]: Aborts feeding, [ENTER]: Restarts feeding.
Cut jig function
After the Skew check starts (feed distance is not designated), the following operation starts the cut jig function.
[REMOTE] -> [FUNCTION]
The cut jig function repeats media cut feed in feed distance and number of cut times designated.
Number of cut times is displayed in count down during cut.
Feed distance : 1010000 mm (unit: 10mm, Default 500 mm)
Number of cut times : 11000 count (unit: 1count, Default 25 count)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [TEMP.CHECK] HEAD TEMP.
1.0
Rev.
5.1.22 [TEMP.CHECK] HEAD TEMP.
Function
Environment temperature of head is displayed (A/D value is also displayed).
A unit selected in the [UNIT SETUP] of the [MACHINE SETUP] is used in the display of head temperature.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [TEMP.CHECK] NOZZLE TEMP.
1.0
Rev.
5.1.23 [TEMP.CHECK] NOZZLE TEMP.
Function
Nozzle temperature error check is executed.
At Normal: OK is displayed.
At error: NG is displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [TEMP.CHECK] HEAT SINK TEMP.
1.0
Rev.
5.1.24 [TEMP.CHECK] HEAT SINK TEMP.
Function
Temperature of HDC board heat sink is displayed (A/D value is also displayed).
A unit selected in the [UNIT SETUP] of the [MACHINE SETUP] is used in the display of heat sink temperature.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [TEMP.CHECK] SLIDER TEMP.
1.0
Rev.
5.1.25 [TEMP.CHECK] SLIDER TEMP.
Function
Temperature read from the thermistor on the ink slider PCB assy is displayed (A/D value is also displayed).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > LINEAR ENCODER
1.0
Rev.
Function
Linear encoder scale and linear sensor are tested.
Move a carriage by the designated distance (3 reciprocations) to display the difference between linear encoder value
and Y-axis motor encoder value. If an error arises during the operation, discontinue the test.
Moving distance: 100 mm Maximum actual operation limit (unit: 100 mm)
LCD display is as follows:
(M*: Y-axis motor encoder, E*: linear encoder)
Moving distance : M=****.* E=****.* (unit: 0.1 mm)
Difference in encoder values between before and after moving
: Mc=****.* Ec=****.* (unit: 0.1 mm)
Encoder values before movement : Ms=***** Es=*****
Encoder values after movement : Mm=***** Em=*****
Encoder values after having moved by designated distance
: Mr=***** Er=*****
Be careful about the carriage which moves in high speed to execute the scan.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [INK CARTRIDGE] PACK&END SENSOR
1.0
Rev.
5.1.27 [INK CARTRIDGE] PACK&END SENSOR
Function
The state of cartridge exist/non-exist sensor and end sensor is displayed.
A slot number on which an error (NO CARTRIDGE, INK NEAR END) is found is displayed.
(Example of LCD display)
PACK 1234 5678
END 1234 5678
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [INK CARTRIDGE] CARTRIDGE VALVE
1.0
Rev.
5.1.28 [INK CARTRIDGE] CARTRIDGE VALVE
Function
Open/close of cartridge valve is checked.
Executes all OPEN/all CLOSE of valves by depressing [FUNCTION] key.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [INK CARTRIDGE] INK-IC CHECK
1.0
Rev.
5.1.29 [INK CARTRIDGE] INK-IC CHECK
Function
Ink cartridge IC is checked.
IC chip data is read and the number of error occurrence at each cartridge is displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [INK CARTRIDGE] CARTRIDGE LED
1.1
Rev.
5.1.30 [INK CARTRIDGE] CARTRIDGE LED
Function
On/Off of cartridge LED is tested.
Use [FUNCTION] to move the cursor in ERROR or ACTIVE status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [WASH CARTRIDGE] PACK&END SENSOR
1.0
Rev.
5.1.31 [WASH CARTRIDGE] PACK&END SENSOR
Function
The state of cartridge exist/non-exist sensor and end sensor is displayed.
#PACK&END SENSOR
PACK :ON END:OFF
(Example of LCD display)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [WASH CARTRIDGE] CARTRIDGE VALVE
1.0
Rev.
5.1.32 [WASH CARTRIDGE] CARTRIDGE VALVE
Function
Open/close of cartridge valve is checked.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [WASH CARTRIDGE] IC CHECK
1.0
Rev.
5.1.33 [WASH CARTRIDGE] IC CHECK
Function
Maintenance washing liquid cartridge IC is checked.
IC chip data is read and the number of error occurrence is displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > HEAD JOINT
1.0
Rev.
5.1.34 HEAD JOINT
Purpose
To test if the connection to the print head or the cutter head is normal
Check the operation by repeating the connection operation.
If an error occurs during the connection operation, carry out the test to find out the cause of the error.
Operation sequence of HEAD JOINT test
Relevant errors
No. Item Description Remarks
1 Test start The connection/release operation of the cutter head or the print head is repeated
according to the connection unit that moves right and left. In this case, ON/OFF
operation of this head clamp is also executed.
The connection and lock of the unit is judged by the following:
The right side of main body: Linear encoder
The left side of main body: Light shut-off plate
The number of connections is expressed by COUNT=n.
2 Test end
Error Description Parts to be checked
C-LOCK Error Abnormal standby position of the cutter head P, C Solenoid
PR Sensor
P-LOCK Error Abnormal standby position of the print head P, C Solenoid
PR Sensor
HEAD JOINT Error Abnormal connection of C head Joint Sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > PINCH ROLLER
1.0
Rev.
5.1.35 PINCH ROLLER
Purpose
To check the changeover operation of the clamping pressure
Operation sequence of PINCH ROLLER test
No. Item Description Remarks
1 Test start [ENTER]:Starting the PINCH ROLLER test
2 Selecting the clamping
pressure and the order of
changeover
Example of panel display: L>0>L>M>L>H
[], []: Selects the order of clamping pressure changeover.
[], []: Selects the clamping pressure (Applied to all the pinch rollers)
Set value: H, M, L, O
3 Selecting the number of
pinch roller until which
the clamping pressure is
changed over.
Example of panel display: PINCH ROLLER No.7
4 Start of test operation [ENTER]: Starts operation.
5 Test end [END]: Test is completed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [CUT PATTERN] TEST
1.1
Rev.
5.1.36 [CUT PATTERN] TEST
Function
Plots the test patterns for plotting evaluation.
The size of the plots is automatically adjusted to the size of the media that is set.
Tests repeatability, paper slippage, etc.
Execute this function after having detected the media by the leaf.
Also, set the tool to PEN.
Set value
Number of Times: 0 to 99 (0 is for limitless loop)
(Test patterns)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [CUT PATTERN] 2m
1.0
Rev.
Function
Cut a test pattern (2m /10m), and check for slippage, skew, etc. which can occur when a long sheet is fed.
Cutting conditions:
Speed: 20 cm/s or more
Pressure: 100 g or less
Offset: 0.30 mm
(CUT PATTERN 2m)
2 m
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [CUT PATTERN] 10m
1.0
Rev.
Function
Cut a test pattern (10 m), and check for slippage, skew, etc. which can occur when a long sheet is fed.
Cutting conditions:
Speed: 20 cm/s or more
Pressure: 100 g or less
Offset: 0.30 mm
(CUT PATTERN 10m)
10 m
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [CUT PATTERN] QUALITY
1.0
Rev.
5.1.39 [CUT PATTERN] QUALITY
Function
Draws patterns to check the cut quality.
(CUT PATTERN: QUALITY)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
yR.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Test Function > [CUT PATTERN] SQUARE
1.0
Rev.
5.1.40 [CUT PATTERN] SQUARE
Function
Checks the cut quality.
The size and number of drawing can be changed.
Set value: 1 to 999 times
(CUT PATTERN: SQUARE)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Other Test
5. Test Items
5.1
Test Function
5.2
Other Test
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Other Test > Determining COM short circuit
1.0
Rev.
5.2.1 Determining COM short circuit
Outline
Check whether the COM circuit generating part has electrical trouble or not.
Procedure
1. Measure a resistance between the test pin TP1 to TP8 and GND
on the main PCB ASSY to determine the COM circuit condi-
tion. Connect the negative terminal of the tester to the GND test
pin (GND1 to 9) and measure the resistance by getting the posi-
tive terminal touch to TP1 to 8.
Measured value of each test pin should be in the range of 17K
ohms to 18K ohms.
After turning off the sub and main power switches in order, unplug the power code.
Check if no electric charge is remaining in the PCB.
Refer to the "4.5.2 Electric charge checking when replace the Electrical Parts"
It is very dangerous if sleep mode functions mistakenly during the operation.
Moreover, the PCB may be damaged in case electric charge still remains inside.
Also there is a possibility of electric shock because of high power voltage applied the high-pressure part
of the power supply PCB assy. Take care to avoid contact with it.
TP8
TP1
If the machine cannot be turned on, it is highly possi-
bility of impedance anomaly of the COM circuit and
short circuit between 42V and GND in the main PCB.
If all the measured value of the TP is shown in the
abnormal range, compare with the measured value of
the normal circuit board since it may be variation of
the tester.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Other Test > Checking Damage of the Print Heads
1.0
Rev.
5.2.2 Checking Damage of the Print Heads
Outline
Check whether the COM line between the print head and the slider PCB has trouble or not.
Procedure
1. Release the locks on both sides of the HDC_FFC ASSY con-
nected to CN1 to CN4 on the main PCB ASSY. And then pull
out the HDC_FFC ASSY.
2. Measure a resistance between the test pin TP6 to 13 and GND
on the ink slider PCB to determine the value. Connect the nega-
tive terminal of the tester to the GND test pin (TPG 1 to 5) and
measure the resistance by getting the positive terminal touch to
TP6 to 13.
Measured value of each test pin should be more than 10M
ohms.
TP8,6,11,10
TP9,7,12,13
If any of the head COM line defect is found, the print
head may be broken. Replace the print heads first.
Connecting the normal main PCB without replacing
the broken head will break the PCB continuously.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Other Test > Checking Damage of the Main PCB ASSY
1.0
Rev.
5.2.3 Checking Damage of the Main PCB ASSY
Outline
Check whether the COM circuit on the main PCB ASSY has trouble or not.
Procedure
1. Release the locks on both sides of the connector for HDC_FFC
ASSY connected to CN1 to CN4 on the main PCB ASSY. And
then pull out the HDC_FFC ASSY.
2. Check the COM circuit referring to [5.2.1].
3. Measure the resistance on both ends of F13 (fuse) to check the
blown fuse.
Measured value of the fuse should be less than 5 ohms.
CN3 CN2 CN1 CN4
F13
If ERROR 205 [47V HEAD VOLTAGE] occurs, F13
(fuse) may be blown.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Other Test > Checking Damage of the Ink Slider PCB
1.0
Rev.
5.2.4 Checking Damage of the Ink Slider PCB
Outline
Check whether the IC on the ink slider PCB has electrical trouble or not.
Procedure
1. Remove the six FFCs at CN1 to CN6 on the ink slider PCB.
2. Measure a resistance between 3.3V pattern and GND pattern on
the ink slider PCB to determine the condition. Connect the neg-
ative terminal of the tester to the GND test pin (TPG1 to 4) and
measure the resistance by getting the positive terminal touch to
5-7 pin of CN3.
Measured value of each test pin should be more than 5K ohms.
GND
CN3 5-7 pin
U1
If ERROR 200 or ERROR 50 occurs after the print
heads replaced, U1 (CPLD, E600074) of the ink slider
PCB may be damaged.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Other Test > Checking Conduction of HDC FFC COM Line
1.1
Rev.
5.2.5 Checking Conduction of HDC FFC COM Line
Outline
Check whether the HDC FFC COM line has disconnection or poor contact or not.
M Y K C
C K Y M
M Lc Y M
C K C Lm
M Y Lc W
C K Lm W
Signal Test pin on the
ink slider PCB
Test pin on the
main PCB
Normal conduction Nozzle line
COM-A TP6 TP1 Less than 3 ohms A*
COM-B TP7 TP2 Less than 3 ohms B*
COM-C TP8 TP3 Less than 3 ohms C*
COM-D TP9 TP4 Less than 3 ohms D*
COM-E TP10 TP5 Less than 3 ohms E*
COM-F TP11 TP6 Less than 3 ohms F*
COM-G TP12 TP7 Less than 3 ohms G*
COM-H TP13 TP8 Less than 3 ohms H*
4-color ink set 6-color ink set 6-color + white ink set
A line C line E line G line
B line D line F line H line
* See below about nozzle lines.
M C Y K
Lk Lk Lm Lc
M C Y K
S W Lm Lc
7-color ink set 8-color ink set
5.2.5 Checking Conduction of HDC FFC COM Line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Procedure
1. Check the conduction of HDC FFC COM line as the figure on
the left.
Main PCB
Ink Slider PCB
Tester
1.6
HDC FFC
The resistance undergoes a little bit change with the
probe location or temperature.
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Other Test > Checking Conduction of HDC FFC COM Line
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Other Test > Checking Conduction of HDC FFC Data Line
1.1
Rev.
5.2.6 Checking Conduction of HDC FFC Data Line
Outline
Check whether the HDC FFC data line has disconnection or poor contact or not.
M Y K C
C K Y M
M Lc Y M
C K C Lm
M Y Lc W
C K Lm W
Signal IC pin on the
ink slider PCB
IC pin on the
main PCB
Normal conduction Nozzle line
SID1+ U8-(10) U46-(2) Less than 22ohms A*
SID1- U8-(9) U46-(3) Less than 22ohms
SID2+ U8-(14) U46-(6) Less than 22ohms B*
SID3+ U8-(2) U46-(10) Less than 22ohms C*
SID4+ U8-(6) U46-(14) Less than 22ohms D*
SID5+ U9-(10) U47-(2) Less than 22ohms E*
SID6+ U9-(14) U47-(6) Less than 22ohms F*
SID7+ U9-(2) U47-(10) Less than 22ohms G*
SID8+ U9-(6) U47-(14) Less than 22ohms H*
4-color ink set 6-color ink set 6-color + white ink set
*See below about nozzle lines.
M C Y K
Lk Lk Lm Lc
M C Y K
S W Lm Lc
7-color ink set
8-color ink set
5.2.6 Checking Conduction of HDC FFC Data Line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Procedure
1. Check the conduction of HDC FFC data line as the figure on the
left.
2. See the figure on the left for the IC pin number.
The mark side is the start of the number.
Main PCB
Ink Slider PCB
Tester
1.6
HDC FFC
The resistance undergoes a little bit change with the
probe location or temperature.
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Test Items > Other Test > Checking Conduction of HDC FFC Data Line
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers
6. Disassembly and Reassembly
6.1
Covers
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.3
Cut Head Carriage
6.4
Drive System
6.5
Electrical Parts
6.6
Sensors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > Cover Layout
1.0
Rev.
6.1.1 Cover Layout
Printer Front
CY Cover F
Maintenance Cover L
Right Cover
KB Cover
C Station Cover 2
Station Cover D
Station Cover U
Main Body
Frame Cover L
Left Station
Cover
Heater Connector
Cover
Head Cover
C Head Cover
6.1.1 Cover Layout
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Printer Rear
When fixing the cover, put it inside of the washer of loosened screw and tighten the screw.
CY cover R
Cartridge Cover
Wiring Cover
PC Cartridge Cover
Power Box Cover
Left Cover
Platen Cover R
Good example: Bad examPle:
The washer of the screw
is outside of the cover.
The washer of the screw
is inside of the cover.
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > Cover Layout
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts
6.1
Covers
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.3
Cut Head Carriage
6.4
Drive System
6.5
Electrical Parts
6.6
Sensors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Cleaning the inside of Head Unit
1.0
Rev.
6.2.1 Cleaning the inside of Head Unit
Outline
Since a water-based transportation liquid (S-46) is contained in the head on factory shipment, this will react with the
solvent ink to form a precipitate.
Therefore, cleaning the inside of head unit with the solvent-washing liquid (MS washing liquid) is necessary before a
new head is installed.
Work procedures
1. Remove damper assy from cleaning Jig in the head.
2. Charge Syringe with 12-16 cc of the washing liquid exclusively
used when replacing the S head.
Types of wash
The washing liquid exclusively used when replacing the S head:
M005026
3. Fit S-damper assy again with syringe.
4. Insert it into Damper Connector on Head.
5. Slowly pour the washing liquid.
Pour 3 to 4 CD of the MS washing liquid into each nozzle in
about 30 seconds.
6. Use waste cloth to hold the liquid that spills out of nozzle.
* Conduct the aboves for every nozzle (x8).
(Charge the syringe with washing liquid through each inlet of 4
nozzles.)
Use protection glasses and gloves during works.
Depending on the working condition, ink may reach your eyes or your skin may be roughed due to ink.
Syringe
S Damper Assy
Be careful of the washing liquid, used for replacing
the S head (M005026), dripping when taking out and
putting in the damper. Especially, dripping on the
FPC connector may damage the head.
Pour the washing liquid slowly, or the Head may be
damaged.
Do not touch the waste cloth to the nozzle surface,
nor rub it with the waste cloth. Both may cause
discharge failure.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Removing of Head Unit
1.0
Rev.
Work procedures
1. Pull out the head FFC assy and head memory cable assy from
the ink slider PCB assy through the top where the wiring cover
removed.
2. Move the print head carriage onto the platen to make your work
easy.
3. Loosen the screws at two locations on the right and left to
remove the P cover BKT.
4. Remove damper lock SPs.
Near side: Rotate right and left edges towards you and
remove them.
Rear side: Rotate right and left edges to the rear and remove
them.
5. Place the waste cloth around the head unit so as not to
contaminate the platen.
6. Pull out all pressure damper SP assys from the print head
carriage and wrap them with the waste cloth so as not to
contaminate their surroundings.
P Cover BKT
Loosen
Damper Lock SP
Wrap with waste cloth.
Do not touch the film of the damper assy.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7. Unscrew the right head lock screw, and remove the AD
locking levers located on the near left towards you and at the
right recess.
8. Remove the clamp of the head FFC assy. While moving the
AD pusher to the left, pull directly up the IH47V-2-G head
unit assy and remove it.
9. Remove the screws and then the AD plate from the IH47V-2-G
head unit assy.
10. Remove head unit holder B and then the FFC and the head
memory cable from the connector.
AD Locking
Lever
Head Lock Screw
AD Locking Spacer
AD pusher
IH47V-2-G Head Unit Assy
Clamp
Head Earth Plate
AD Plate
* Take care not
to drop
Screw
IH47V-2-G Head Unit Assy
Take care for the head earth plate not to drop
between the print head and the AD plate.
Head Unit Holder B
Head FFC
Assy
Acetate Fabric Tape
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Removing of Head Unit
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Mounting of Head Unit
1.0
Rev.
Work procedures
1. Bond the head unit holder B with the head FFC assy and the
head memory cable together using the acetate fabric tape and
mount it on IH47V-2-G head unit assy.
2. Insert the head earth plate in the AD plate and clamp three
screws under the condition of lightly pushing the IH47V-2-G
head unit assy towards the right recess.
3. Position the IH47V-2-G head unit assy using the positioning
pin at a recess, AD pusher on the near side towards you, and
tilt adjusting jig, and mount the unit assy on the slider.
4. Hold the head FFC assy and the head memory cable and
cable with a clamp.
Head Unit Holder B
Head FFC
Assy
Acetate Fabric Tape
If entering the head ID manually, note it in advance.
(Normally, you do not need to do it because of
automatic writing.)
Since it is difficult to mount the head memory cable
after FFC has been already taped, tape the head
memory cable and FFC together.
Head Earth Plate
AD Plate
Screw
Move it in a slight distance
towards the right recess.
Do not touch the nozzle surface.
The washing liquid must not attach to the head
FFC.
Do not push the head strongly because it becomes
distorted to influence printing quality.
AD pusher
Head Unit
Clamp
Positioning Pin
Be careful not to contact
with the nozzle surface.
Take care for the nozzle surface not to touch the AD
pusher.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5. Pay attention to the direction of the AD locking spacer and
tighten the left and right AD locking levers.
Left: Set the depression towards the front.
Right:Set the depression sideways.
6. Mount the right head lock screw.
7. Insert the pressure damper SP assy in the order described on
the tab.
8. Mount the damper lock SP from a recess.
9. Mount the P cover BKT and tighten the right and left screws.
10. Connect the head FFC assy and head memory cable assy to the
ink slider PCB assy.
AD Locking
Lever
Head Lock Screw
AD Locking Spacer
Tighten the AD locking lever to a certain degree and
go it down for locking.
At this time, if tightened too weakly, the lever cannot
be locked, and if it is tightened too strongly, the AD
locking spacer may crack. Proceed carefully with work.
Damper Lock SP
This is used as a
supporting point for
mounting from a recess.
If the connection of the damper is loosened, the
damper lock will not work. Make sure that no loose
connection exists.
P Cover BKT
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Mounting of Head Unit
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Pump Motor
1.0
Rev.
6.2.4 Pump Motor
Work procedures
1. Remove the station cover U.
2. Remove the pump tube connected to the cap head.
3. Remove the pump motor assy connector and then stepping
motor assy together with the pump assy.
4. Remove the stepping motor.
5. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
Protrude the pump tube of the discharge side from tube end by 5
to 9 mm.
Pump Motor
Screw
Take care not to pollute the surroundings with waste
ink or washing liquid.
Pump Motor
Screw
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Pump Assy
1.0
Rev.
6.2.5 Pump Assy
Work procedures
1. Remove the station cover U.
2. Remove the pump tube connected to the CP coupler.
3. Remove the pump assy from the pump BKT.
Protrude the pump tube of the discharge side from tube end by 5
to 9 mm.
Pump Assy
Pump Assy
Take care not to pollute the surroundings with waste
ink or washing liquid.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Cap Assy
1.0
Rev.
6.2.6 Cap Assy
Work procedures
1. Turn off the main power supply of the printer.
2. Manually move the head unit over the platen.
3. Remove the following covers.
Station Cover U
Wiring Cover
4. Remove the W ink guard.
5. Remove two tubes from the CP coupler.
6. Remove the screws, and then remove the cap assy while
turning back the PC pipe.
Be sure to turn off the main circuit breaker to prevent unexpected movements of the printer.
Cap Assy
W Ink Guard
CP Coupler
Screw
Cap Assy
Screw
At the time of assembly, screw up the cap assy while
striking it against a recess.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Cap Head Assy
1.0
Rev.
6.2.7 Cap Head Assy
Work procedures
1. Turn off the main power supply of the printer.
2. Manually move the head unit over the platen.
Station Cover U
Wiring Cover
4. While pushing down the cap head assy, slide it to the left and
remove it from cap slider 33.
5. Remove the tube, cap SPG and cap stopper from the cap head
assy.
Cap Head Assy
Cap Head Assy
Cap Slider 33
Tube
Cap SPG
Cap Stopper
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Valve Assy
1.0
Rev.
6.2.8 Valve Assy
Work procedures
1. Execute [MACHINE SETUP] [#ADJUST] [HEAD
ADJUST] [HEAD WASH] to discharge the ink.(See 4.2.7)
ICU Cover F
ICU Cover R
3. Remove snap pin A and then the link.
4. Removes screws to take off the cartridge solenoid BKT A
together with the solenoid.
5. Remove the valve N-3 M6 assy and loosen the joint screws to
remove the tube.
Ink Cartridge Solenoid Assy
Valve N-3 M6 Assy
Link
Snap pin A
Cartridge Solenoid BKT A
Screw
Valve N-3 M6 Assy
O-ring
Joint Screw
Tube
Take care not to contaminate the surroundings with ink.
Also, take care not to lose the O-ring.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Changing Joint
1.2
Rev.
Outline
The above three ways of setting up the ink supply channel are possible in this machine.
Four colors are set at factory shipment, but it is possible to change to other colors by coupler opening and closing.
Following is a description of procedures to change to six or more colors.
L
m
Ink supply path (4-color fill: at factory shipment)
Ink supply path (6-color fill)
L
m
SS21 Ink supply path (6-color+white fill)
Joint
Eco-PA1 Ink supply path (7-color fill)
ES3 Ink supply path (8-color fill)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Work procedures
1. Execute [MACHINE SETUP] [#ADJUST] [HEAD
ADJUST] [HEAD WASH] to discharge the ink. (See 4.2.7)
2. Remove the cartridge cover.
3. Loosen the joint screws and remove the tube and O-rings.
4. Put on the rubber plugs on the coupler.
5. Tighten the joint screws.
Leave a space of around 0.5 mm between the coupler and screw.
Joint Screw
Tube
O-ring
Rubber Plugs
Make sure that O-ring is not remaining in the joint
screws.
m
m 5 . 0
When clamping the joint screws, do not clamp them
too much.
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Changing Joint
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Cut Head Carriage
6.1
Covers
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.3
Cut Head Carriage
6.4
Drive System
6.5
Electrical Parts
6.6
Sensors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Cut Head Carriage > Pen Assy and LED Pointer
1.0
Rev.
6.3.1 Pen Assy and LED Pointer
Work procedures
C Head cover
CY cover F
2. Move the cutting carriage on the platen.
3. Remove the S-guide, and then the auto cutter assy.
4. Remove screws from the rear and the front of the printer to take
off the pen assy.
5. Remove the connector from PCB and also LED pointer from
the pen assy.
Pen Assy
LED Pointer
S Guide
Auto Cutter Assy
Take care not to change the orientation of the hook of
the whirl-stop SP.
Changing the orientation will change the pen
pressure and the pen landing values.
Pen Assy
LED Pointer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Cut Head Carriage > Auto Cutter Assy
1.0
Rev.
6.3.2 Auto Cutter Assy
Work procedures
CY Cover F
Head Cover
2. Move the cutting carriage on the platen.
3. Remove the S-guide and then the auto cutter assy.
Auto Cutter Assy
S guide
Auto Cutter Assy
Take care not to change the orientation of the hook of
the whirl-stop SP.
Changing the orientation will change the pen
pressure and the pen landing values.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Cut Head Carriage > Mark Assy
1.1
Rev.
6.3.3 Mark Assy
Work procedures
1. Remove the pen assy.
Refer to 6.3.1 Pen Assy and LED Pointer.
2. Remove the connector (CN3) of the mark sensor assy from the
cutter slider PCB assy.
3. Remove the mark sensor assy together with the T sensor BKT
from the rear of the printer.
4. Remove the T sensor cover and then mark sensor assy.
Mark Assy
T Sensor BKT
T Sensor BKT
Mark Sensor Assy
T Sensor Cover
In reassembly, pay attention to harness treatment.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System
6.1
Covers
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.3
Cut Head Carriage
6.4
Drive System
6.5
Electrical Parts
6.6
Sensors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > X-axis Motor
1.0
Rev.
6.4.1 X-axis Motor
Work procedures
Maintenance Cover L
Cartridge cover
Left cover
2. Remove the X pulley cover.
3. Remove the screws that fix the XM BKT.
4. Disconnect the X-axis motor connector.
5. Remove the spring, and then remove the XM BKT and X-axis
motor from the main body.
X-axis Motor
X Pulley Cover
XM BKT
XM BKT
Remove the spring
6.4.1 X-axis Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6. Remove the XM BKT screws and then the servo motor assy (X).
Servo Motor Assy (X)
XM BKT
After mounting the motor, if the hunting sound is
heard when the motor drives, make adjustments
making reference to the following:
Adjusting the X-axis motor current
The belt tension does not need to be adjusted.
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > X-axis Motor
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Y-axis Motor
1.0
Rev.
6.4.2 Y-axis Motor
Work procedures
C Y Cover F
KB Cover
Right Cover
2. Remove the KB BKT screws, disconnect the connector and
then remove the keyboard assy.
3. Manually move the print head carriage on the platen and
remove the D-BKT cover.
Y-axis Motor
KB BKT
D-BKT Cover
6.4.2 Y-axis Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4. Loosen the screws that affix the Y-axis motor belt tension to
reduce the belt tension.
5. Remove the screws from the top of the Y-axis motor and then
remove the YM top plate.
6. Remove the YM stud 33.
7. Remove the Y-axis motor total assy 33 while taking care not to
drop it.
8. Release the clamps and the cable (directly connected to main
PCB assy).
Loosen
YM Top Plate
YM Stud 33
Y-axis motor total assy 33
Good
Example:
Bad
Example:
Slanting
Horizontal in the middle
Bad
Example:
Good
Example:
Shifted lower
Horizontal but upper
Mount the Y-axis motor so that the belt is
horizontal and centered on the Y drive pulley
(upper side is also acceptable).
Adjusting the Y-axis motor current
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Y-axis Motor
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Y Drive Pulley
1.0
Rev.
Work procedures
C Y Cover F
KB Cover
CY-T Cover
Right Cover
Maintenance Cover L
Cartridge Cover
Left Cover
2. Remove the KB BKT screws, disconnect the connector and
then remove the keyboard assy.
3. Manually move the print head carriage on the platen and
remove the D-BKT cover.
Y-axis Motor
KB BKT
D-BKT Cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4. Remove the screws that hold the washing cartridge assy in
place, and slide the washing cartridge assy towards the back.
5. Loosen the screws from the Y-SP plate on the left side of the
main body, and release the tension of the Y drive belt.
6. Remove the screw from the top of the Y drive pulley.
7. Remove the traction head assy screws and separate them from
the belt holder.
8. Slide out the connection point of the Y drive belt, and remove
either the left or right belt holder 1 from the belt holder.
Y Drive Belt 33
Y-SP Plate
Loosen
Traction Head Assy
Belt Holder
Do not remove the screws.
Belt Holder 1
Belt Holder
Do not remove the Y drive belt from the slider.
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9. Remove the screw, and detach the D BKT U from the Y drive
pulley.
10. Loosen the screws for fixing the Y-axis motor belt tension, and
reduce the tension of the belt.
11. Remove the O-ring from the top of the Y drive pulley, and then
remove the two belts to detach the Y drive pulley.
D BKT U
Loosen
O-ring
Y Drive Pulley Assy Take care not to lose the O-ring.
Good
Example:
Bad
Example:
Slanting
Horizontal in the middle
Bad
Example:
Good
Example:
Shifted lower
Horizontal but upper
Mount the Y-axis motor so that the belt is
horizontal and centered on the Y drive pulley
(upper side is also acceptable).
Adjusting the Y-axis motor current
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Y Drive Belt
1.0
Rev.
6.4.4 Y Drive Belt
Work procedures
C Y Cover F
CY-T Cover
Maintenance Cover L
Cartridge Cover
Left Cover
2. Remove the traction head assy screws and separate them from
the belt holder.
3. Loosen the screws from the Y-SP plate on the left side of the
main body, and release the tension of the Y drive belt.
Y Drive Belt
Traction Head Assy
Belt Holder
Y Drive Belt 33
Y-SP Plate
Loosen
6.4.4 Y Drive Belt
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4. Slide out the connection point of the Y drive belt, and remove
either the left or right belt holder 1 from the belt holder.
5. Remove the belt holder1 screws.
6. Pry open the belt holder S with a slotted screwdriver or the
like, then slide the belt holder S to detach from the belt.
7. Stick together the ends of the old belt and the new belt using
rubber tape or the like, and make one revolution of the belt.
8. Once the belt has made one revolution, remove the joining tape
and pass the belt through the rear side of the slider.
9. Align the belt holder 1 and the teeth on the left and right belt
ends, and attach the belt holder S while engaging the teeth.
Then tighten the screw.
10. Connect the left and right belt holders 1 with the belt holder.
11. Attach the belt holder and slider using a screw.
12. Loosen the screws on the Y-SP plate on the left side of the main
body, and increase the Y drive belt tension.
13. Reverse the disassembly procedure for the subsequent
reassemblies
Do not remove the screws.
Belt Holder 1
Belt Holder
Make one revolution
of the belt.
Tape
New belt
Engage the tooth of belt ends
with belt holder 1.
Belt Holder 1
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Y Drive Belt
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Linear Encoder Scale
1.0
Rev.
Work procedures
CY Cover F
Head Cover
2. Remove the Encoder PCB Assy.
3. Remove the screws from the right end of the linear encoder
scale, and detach the linear encoder scale.
4. Remove the screw from the left end of the linear encoder scale,
and detach the linear encoder scale together with the springs.
5. Remove the scale hook and scale holder R from the linear
encoder scale.
While at work, be sure not to attach fingerprints or oil to the linear encoder scale. Also, pay attention not
to break or scratch it. (If contaminated, clean the scale with a neutral detergent.)
Scale Holder R
Scale SP
Scale Holder L
Scale Hook
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6. Peel off the left end (the side with two holes) of the protection
film on the new linear encoder scale.
7. Mount the scale hook on the linear encoder scale so that the
surface where the protection film is stuck faces to the Y bar side.
8. Engage the scale hook with the scale base L through a spring,
and mount the linear encoder scale on the scale base R while
peeling off the protection film.
9. Reverse the disassembly procedure for the subsequent
reassemblies
While at work, be sure not to attach fingerprints or
oil to the linear encoder scale. Also, pay attention not
to break or scratch it. (If contaminated, clean the
scale with a neutral detergent.)
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Linear Encoder Scale
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Wiper Unit
1.0
Rev.
6.4.6 Wiper Unit
Work procedures
Station Cover U
C Station Cover 2
2. Remove the screws, and remove the wiper assy from the base.
3. Release the clamp under the station and disconnect the wiper
motor connector.
4. Disconnect the wiper origin sensor connector.
Wiper Unit
Wiper Unit
6.4.6 Wiper Unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5. When replacing only the motor, remove the wiper drive link and
the screws to detach the motor.
Wiper Drive Link
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Wiper Unit
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > GR Roller Assy
1.1
Rev.
Work procedures
CY Cover F
Cartridge Cover
Maintenance Cover L
Left Cover
Left Station Cover
Heater connector Cover
MS Cover 2
MS Cover 1
2. Remove the connector of pre-heater and print heater and then
remove the platen cover R and platen C30.
3. Loosen all PF coupling set screws.
4. Remove all GR roller 30 set screws from the lower part of the
spike shaft.
After turning off the sub and main power switches, unplug the power cord. Make sure to take15 minutes
before restarting the operation.
Also, there is a possibility of electric shock because of high power voltage applied to the high-pressure
part of the power supply PCB assy. Take care to avoid contact with it.
GR Roller Assy
Platen C30
PF Coupling
Loosen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5. Disconnect the left end of the shaft from the PF coupling and
remove the GR roller assy.
GR Roller Assy
BR Holder 30
Press against
Front of the printer
Press against
Tighten the screws
in order from left
For installation, tighten the screws in order, starting
with the leftmost one while pushing the shaft to the
left and pushing the BR holder 30 toward the front.
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > GR Roller Assy
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Take-up Motor
1.0
Rev.
6.4.8 Take-up Motor
Work procedures
1. Remove the take-up cover (S).
2. Disconnect all connectors on the take-up motor PCB assy.
3. Remove the M motor BKT (S)-Si from the Roll base 2(BR).
4. Loosen the fixing screws that connect the motor shaft and M
gear shaft (S)-Si and then remove the M gear BKT (S)-Si.
5. Remove the brushless motor SK.
Brushless Motor SK
M Motor BKT (S)-Si
Loosen
M Gear BKT (S)-Si
M Gear Shaft (S)-Si
Brushless Motor SK
When fixing the motor shaft and M gear shaft (S)-Si
with fixing screws, be sure to tighten the screws at
the plane port of the motor shaft D cut point.
<Good example> <Bad example>
Fixing Screw
M Gear shaft
Motor Shaft
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > C Connecting Hook
1.0
Rev.
6.4.9 C Connecting Hook
Work procedures
1. Move the cut head carriage on the platen.
2. Remove the spring and E-ring to take off the C connecting hook.
C Connecting Hook
C Connecting Hook
Spring
E-ring
Take care not to lose the spring and E-ring.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > P Head Connecting Hook
1.0
Rev.
6.4.10 P Head Connecting Hook
Work procedures
CY Cover F
Station Cover U
C Station Cover 2
KB Cover
2. Remove P head lock solenoid assy from the CP station base.
3. Remove the spring and E-ring to take off the P head
connecting hook.
P Head Connecting Hook
P Head Lock Solenoid Assy
P Head Connecting Hook
Spring
E-ring
Take care not to lose the spring and E-ring.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Clamp Assy
1.1
Rev.
6.4.11 Clamp Assy
Work procedures
1. Remove the CY cover F.
2. Lower the clamp lever and set the lever below the clamp assy to
the left.
3. Remove the cam holder from the rear of the printer and clamp
assy.
Clamp Assy
Bottom lever: left side
Cam Holder
PR Guide
Cam Holder Hook
When mounting the clamp assy, place the front right
and left hooks on the PR guide and mount it horizon-
tally so that the right and left cam holder hooks can
be placed in the groove of the clamp assy.
For easy work, set clamp pressure to Low by manual
operation and lower the clamp lever.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts
6.1
Covers
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.3
Cut Head Carriage
6.4
Drive System
6.5
Electrical Parts
6.6
Sensors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Power Supply PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
Work procedures
1. Turn off the main power supply and remove the power plug
from the main body.
2. Remove the electrical box cover.
3. Disconnect all connectors on PCB.
4. Remove the power supply PCB assy.
Power Supply PCB Assy
Power Supply PCB Assy
Screw
Before mounting the power box cover, adjust the
voltage of the power supply PCB assy.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Main PCB Assy
1.2
Rev.
6.5.2 Main PCB Assy
Outline
If main PCB assy has replaced, various parameters must be registered to main PCB assy ROM after the replacement.
Considerable time is required to readjust and reconfigure these settings. Therefore, for ease of use and better printing
quality, copy (upload) the setting value to a PC before replacement, and write (download) the copied settings onto the
main PCB assy from the PC after replacement.
Work procedures
from the main body.
3. Disconnect all connectors on PCB.
If it is impossible to upload the parameters, note the necessary adjustment values.
Then manually register the values after replacing the main PCB assy.
Main PCB Assy
6.5.2 Main PCB Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4. Draw the regenerative resistance PCB assy out of the main
PCB assy.
5. Remove the main PCB assy.
6. Remove the following PCB from the removed main PCB assy.
PRAM PCB Assy
Cutter Driver PCB Assy
Regenerative Resistance
PCB Assy
Main PCB Assy
Screw
PRAM PCB Assy Cutter Driver PCB Assy
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Main PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > PRAM PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
6.5.3 PRAM PCB Assy
Work procedures
from the main body.
3. Remove PRAM PCB assy from the main PCB assy.
PRAM PCB Assy
PRAM PCB Assy
Screw
Inter-PCB connector is used to connect PRAM PCB
assy to main PCB assy.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Head Memory PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
Work procedures
Front Cover
Print Head Cover
2. Move the head unit on the platen.
3. Release the hook of the ID PCB cover, remove the head
memory PCB assy and then disconnect all the cables.
Head Memory PCB Assy
ID PCB Cover
Head Memory PCB Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > LED PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
6.5.5 LED PCB Assy
Work procedures
2. Remove LED BKT and then LED PCB assy.
LED PCB Assy
LED PCB Assy
LED BKT
Screw
Screw
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Station PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
Work procedures
KB Cover
Right Cover
2. Disconnect all cables from PCB.
3. Remove the station PCB assy.
Station PCB Assy
Station PCB Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Paper Sensor
1.0
Rev.
6.5.7 Paper Sensor
Work procedures
Platen Cover R
Left cover
Cartridge cover
2. Disconnect the connector of pre-heater and then remove the
platen cover R.
3. Remove the paper sensor and then disconnect the connector.
Paper Sensor
Paper Sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > X-axis Motor Relay PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
Work procedures
2. Disconnect all FFCs and connectors from PCB.
X-axis Motor Relay PCB Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3. Remove the X-axis motor relay PCB assy.
Screw
X-axis Motor Relay PCB Assy
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > X-axis Motor Relay PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Ink Slider PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
Work procedures
CY Cover F
Wiring Cover
2. Move the ink carriage onto the station and disconnect all cables
from PCB.
Ink Slider PCB Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3. Remove the ink slider PCB assy.
Ink Slider PCB Assy
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Ink Slider PCB Assy
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Cutter Slider PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
Work procedures
1. Remove the C head cover.
2. Disconnect all FFCs and cables from PCB.
After turning off the main power supply switch, make sure to take 15 minutes before restarting the operation.
Cutter Slider PCB Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3. Remove the screw, release the hook and then remove cutter
slider PCB assy.
Cutter Slider PCB Assy
Screw
Releasing of the hook
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Cutter Slider PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Keyboard PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
Work procedures
1. Remove the KB cover.
2. Disconnect the cable from PCB and then remove the KB panel.
Keyboard PCB Assy
KB Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3. Remove the keyboard PCB assy.
KB Panel
Keyboard PCB Assy
Key Top
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Keyboard PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Encoder PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
Work procedures
7
C Y Cover F
Head Cover
2. Loosen the screws at two locations on the right and left to
remove the P cover BKT.
3. Remove damper lock SPs.
Near side: Rotate right and left edges towards you and
remove them.
Rear side: Rotate right and left edges to the rear and remove
them.
Encoder PCB Assy
P Cover BKT
Loosen
Damper Lock SP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4. Insert a driver through the gap of the damper to loosen the
screws, remove the encoder PCB assy together with L sensor
BKT, and then release the connector.
5. Remove the encoder PCB assy.
L Sensor BKT
Releasing
connector
Encoder PCB Assy
L Sensor BKT
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Encoder PCB Assy
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Fan Motor
1.0
Rev.
6.5.13 Fan Motor
Work procedures
C Y Cover F
Cartridge Cover
Maintenance Cover L
Left Cover
Left Station Cover
Heater Connector Cover
MS Cover 2
MS Cover 1
2. Remove the connector of pre-heater and print heater and then
remove the platen cover R, platen C30 and platen F.
3. Remove the FAN duct V1 by lifting it obliquely.
Adsorption Fan Assy
Platen C30
Platen F
FAN Duct V1
6.5.13 Fan Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4. Remove the screws with a ratchet or stubby screwdriver, dis-
connect the connector and remove the adsorption fan assy.
Adsorption Fan Assy
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Fan Motor
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Take-up Motor PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
6.5.14 Take-up Motor PCB Assy
Work procedures
1. Remove the take-up cover (S).
2. Disconnect all connectors and then remove the take-up motor
PCB SK assy.
Take-up Motor PCB Assy
Take-up Motor PCB Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > ID Contact PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
Work procedures
2. Remove the cartridge holder B.
3. Remove cartridge base U related to the right or left side.
ID Contact PCB Assy
Cartridge Holder B
LED PCB FFC is connected. Pay attention to
handling.
Cartridge Base U
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4. Remove the relevant cartridge guide.
5. Remove the connector and loosen the screws to take off the ID
contact PCB assy together with ID PCB holder.
6. Remove the ID contact PCB assy.
Cartridge Guide
ID Contact PCB Assy
Loosen
ID Contact PCB Assy
ID PCB Holder
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > ID Contact PCB Assy
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Detector Assy, I/C, Y
1.0
Rev.
Work procedures
1. Remove the relevant cartridge guide.
See ?6.5.15 ID Contact PCB Assy?.
2. Remove the screw, release the hook and then remove cartridge
frame.
Exist/non-exist Sensor
Near End Sensor
Releasing of
the hook
Cartridge Frame
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3. Remove the detector assy, I/C, Y from the cartridge guide.
Near End Sensor
Exist/non-exist Sensor
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Detector Assy, I/C, Y
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Replacement procedure for fuse of the
1.0
Rev.
6.5.17 Replacement procedure for fuse of the Main PCB
Outline
Fuse F13 of the Main PCB may blowout when [Error205 47V HEAD VOLTAGE] occurred.
When fuse F13 has blown out after operate "5.2.3 Checking Damage of the Main PCB ASSY", follow the directions
below to replace the fuse.

Work procedures
1. Remove the Power Box Cover.
2. Check if no electric charge is remaining in the PCB.
Refer to the "4.5.2 Electric charge checking when replace the
Electrical Parts".
3. Remove the fuse from socket using longnose plier.
Precaustion: Make sure to follow the flow at "7.2.3 Electrical Troubleshooting" first and then replace the
fuse.
HDC FFC
Longnose plier
Fuse Socket
Be sure not to remove the fuse too strong.
Also be careful not to break electric parts or cables
around the fuse.
6.5.17 Replacement procedure for fuse of the Main PCB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4. Fix the new fuse to the socket using longnose plier.
Check if the fuse is set in proper position of the
socket while visual checking and touching with fin-
gures.
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Replacement procedure for fuse of the
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors
6.1
Covers
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.3
Cut Head Carriage
6.4
Drive System
6.5
Electrical Parts
6.6
Sensors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Sensor Layout
1.1
Rev.
6.6.1 Sensor Layout
Detector Assy, I/C, Y (x8)
LED Pointer
Cartridge Near End
Sensor (x8)
Paper Sensor
Y-origin Sensor
Wiper Origin Sensor
Clamp Sensor
Cartridge Near End
Sensor (x8)
Detector Assy, I/C, Y (x8)
Linear Encoder
Head Height Sensor
Mark Sensor
Joint Sensor
PR Sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions
7. Troubleshooting
7.1
Details on Errors and Malfunctions
7.2
Detailed Methods of Coping with
the Malfunctions
7.3
Checksheet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > Concerning Errors and Malfunctions
1.1
Rev.
Outline
This chapter describes the troubleshooting for this machine.
Rough identification of the source of the trouble
At the beginning of troubleshooting, it is necessary to identify roughly which functions the trouble relates to.
Problems can be roughly classified into those that relate to the plotter itself and those that involve the connection
between the plotter and the host computer.
Problems with the plotter itself
The cause of the trouble can be identified by executing appropriate functions or using test functions.
Problems concerning the connection to the host computer
Hardware: Broken wire or faulty contact of cables
Software: Transmission by improper application setting
In the standard setting of this machine, priority is given to the host computer.
Check the settings on the host computer to see if there is any improper parameter setting.
START
Rough identification of error source
Execute appropriate functions or use test
functions of this machine.
Precautions in maintenance
Refer to 7.1.2 List of Error Messages.
Troubles on the host computer side
If this troubleshooting cannot correct the trouble, check to see if the same trouble occurs
with another host computer (if possible).
Do the
above functions operate
normally?
No
Is there error message?
Yes
No
Yes
Is the
trouble due to the ink
quality?
Yes
No
Refer to 7.2 Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions.
The details will be added later.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Checking procedure
This section describes troubleshooting procedures for the problems for which error messages are displayed.
1. Identifying the error category
The causes of errors can be classified into the following categories:
Handling error on the host computer side
Trouble on the host computer side
Trouble with the interface cable
Printer handling error
Printer mechanical trouble
Printer hardware trouble
Printer firmware trouble
2. Initial action
Refer to the error message, and judge whether the trouble lies on the host computer side or on the printer side.
Has any of the interface conditions (printer model setting, command, communication conditions, etc.) been
changed?
Does the trouble occur under specific conditions?
Does the same trouble occur repeatedly?
3. Failure on the printer side
Take the following steps to repair the printer.
Replace the defective part (sensor, etc.) or make the necessary adjustment.
Replace the main PCB assy.
4. Repair at the factory
If the error recurs even after the corrective measures specified here are taken, return the plotter to the factory of
MIMAKI for repair.
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > Concerning Errors and Malfunctions
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages
1.2
Rev.
List of error messages (1/ 6)
Error
No.
Indication on LCD Cause Remedy
01
----- ERROR 01 -----
MAIN ROM
An error occurs on the control PCB (ROM) Turn off the main power, and turn it on a little later.
If the error occurs again, carry out the followings.
1. Replace the main PCB assy. (See 3.4.1) 02 ----- ERROR 02 -----
MAIN RAM
An error occurs on the control PCB (RAM)
03
----- ERROR 03 -----
POWER +5V
An error occurs on the control PCB
(Power voltage +5V)
Turn off the main power, and turn it on a little later.
1. Replace the power supply PCB assy.
(See 6.5.1)
2. Replace the main PCB assy. (See 3.4.1)
----- ERROR 03 -----
POWER +24V
(Power voltage +24V)
----- ERROR 03 -----
POWER +42V
(Power voltage +42V)
04
----- ERROR 04 -----
F-ROM
(Parameter ROM)
1. After uploading parameters, initialize all
parameters.
If the state is not restored, replace the main
PCB assy with a new one. (See 3.4.1)
06 ----- ERROR 06 -----
SD-RAM
(SDRAM)
2. Replace the PRAM PCB assy. (See 6.5.3)
07 ----- ERROR 07 -----
HEAD (----)
An error was detected in the head connection.
(Abnormal temperature was detected.)
Refer to Electrical Troubleshooting ( See 7.2.3 ),
and replace the following parts if it has damaged.
1. Replace the head FFC and the HDC FFC cable.
2. Replace the head.
3. Replace the ink slider PCB assy. (See 6.5.9)
----- ERROR 07 -----
VOLTAGE (----)
An error was detected in the head connection.
(Abnormal voltage was detected.)
08 ----- ERROR 08 -----
LinearENCODER:SENSOR
An error occurred in detection by the linear
encoder. (Counting impossible)
1. Check of the mounting location for the linear
encoder scale and encoder PCB assy.
2. Replace the encoder PCB assy. (See 6.5.12)
----- ERROR 08 -----
LinearENCODER:DIR.
encoder. (Wrong orientation)
----- ERROR 08 -----
LinearENCODER:COUNT
encoder. (Read-out count error)
09 ----- ERROR 09 -----
FPGA ERROR
(FPGA PDC)
----- ERROR 09 -----
HDC ERROR (----)
(FPGA HDC)
10
----- ERROR 10 -----
COMMAND ERROR
Other data than commands is received. 1. Change over the setting of [COMMON
SETTING] -> [RECEIVED DATA], depending
on the application being used.
2. Clear the data of uncompleted printing.
3. Check the USB cable.
(specifications, cable length, etc.)
10C
---- ERROR 10-C ----
COMMAND
11
----- ERROR 11 -----
PARAMETER ERROR
Parameter out of the numeral value range is
received.
11C ---- ERROR 11-C ----
PARAMETER
12
----- ERROR 12 -----
MAINTENANCE COMMAND
Other data than commands is received. Turn off the main power, and turn it on a little later.
Replace the main PCB assy. (See 3.4.1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12C ---- ERROR 12-C ----
DEVICE
Inappropriate instruction was given concerning the
printer controlling.
Modify the instruction and send the data again, or
send the data after restarting the printer.
If the abnormality occurs again, carry out the fol-
lowings.
13C ---- ERROR 13-C ----
PM OVER
The polygon data exceeded the receive buffer. Divide the polygon data before sending them.
15C
---- ERROR 15-C ----
AUTO FEED
Media feeding cannot be carried out according to
the length specified by the data.
Set a longer media and carry out the operation
again.
16 ----- ERROR 16 -----
MRL COMMAND
Received data does not follow the command sys-
tem set in the printer.
Send the data related to the class of commands,
using an application corresponding to this printer.
1. Make sure that the transmission data is in
MRL-III command system (data ripped for
CJV).
25
----- ERROR 25 -----
FULL-SPEED
USB2.0 interface occurred between the host PC
and the printer. (Full-Speed Mode connection)
Check whether the host PC is USB2.0 interface-
compliant or not. (Though the host PC can be used
in either case, use of Hi-Speed Mode connection is
recommended.)
----- ERROR 25 -----
PACKET SIZE OVER
and the printer.
1. Make sure that the connection to the host PC is
correct.
2. Make sure that there is no occurrence of an
error in the host PC or the application runs nor-
mally.
----- ERROR 25 -----
USB PROTOCOL
and the printer.
----- ERROR 25 -----
USB ENVIRONMENT
and the printer.
----- ERROR 25 -----
USB DATA
and the printer.
30
----- ERROR 30 -----
OPERATION ERROR
Improper operations were performed on the opera-
tion panel.
The operation cannot be carried out due to the rea-
son indicated in the second line.
Clear the corresponding error and carry out the
operation.
31C
---- ERROR 31-C ----
NO DATA
[No. COPIES] cannot be carried out due to the
absence of data in the receive buffer.
(Refer to the page of [No. COPIES] function in the
OPERATION MANUAL.)
32C ---- ERROR 32-C ----
DATA TOO BIG
[No. COPIES] cannot be carried out due to the
large size of the received data.
33C
---- ERROR 33-C ----
MEDIA SIZE
Media is too short in the length of the feed direc-
tion.
Use longer media.
34
----- ERROR 34 -----
PRINT DATA REMAIN
Functional settings were changed or an inoperative
function was attempted while the printer has
already received data and printing of the data has
not been completed.
Print all the data received, or clear them all and
carry out the operation again from the start.
(If uncompleted printing data is remaining, provide
an account concerning the operating-condition
modification and the inoperative function.)
34C
---- ERROR 34-C ----
CUT DATA REMAIN
An inappropriate operation was carried out during
the cutting was being suspended by pressing
[REMOTE] key.
Wait for the cutting data to be completely carried
out or clear the data.
35C
---- ERROR 35-C ----
cutNG WIND
Since take-up is executed, auto cutting of media is
not performed.
Auto cutting is not performed if take-up timing is
set by the roll detection setting function.
To give priority to auto cutting, set [TAKEUP TIM-
MING] to OFF.
Error
No.
R.1.1
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
36C ---- ERROR 36-C----
MARK DETECT
The mark cannot be detected.
(After the print media detection)
Check the followings.
Media curling
Specified location for starting the mark detec-
tion.
Is the black mark printed on the white back-
ground of the media?
Arent there any unnecessary prints or blots and
adhesion of dirt inside the marks?
Arent there any errors in each setting of the
mark?
---- ERROR 36-C ----
JOG & <ENT>or<END>
[MARK DETECT] and [JOG & <ENT>or<END>]
are alternately displayed during the copying and
cutting of the mark.
During this error, the write pointer stops at the start-
ing point for the mark detection.
In case the write pointer position is not in the right
place for starting the mark detection, make a posi-
tion adjustment using the [JOG] key and restart the
mark detection by pressing [ENTER]. And also
check the followings.
When using a limp media which is lacking in
elasticity or whose width is more than about
800 mm, increase the number of pinch rollers
used.
When using the limp media, adjust the size of
the mark at 8 mm or more on a side, and allo-
cate the marks to be copied 8 mm or more apart
from each other.
Is the black mark printed on the white back-
ground of the media?
Arent there any unnecessary prints or blots and
adhesion of dirt inside the marks?
Arent there any errors in each setting of the
mark?
Since the media may be floated by the use of the
media holder, carry out the mark detection with-
out using it.
37C
---- ERROR 37-C ----
MARK ORIGIN
As a result of the mark detection, the origin was
detected outside the usable plot area.
Arrange the marks within the usable plot area.
38C
---- ERROR 38-C ----
MARK SCALE
[MARK SCALE] and [JOG & <ENT>or<END>]
are alternately displayed during the copying and
cutting of the mark.
(Refer to ERROR 36-C JOG &
<ENT>or<END>)
40
----- ERROR 40 -----
MOTOR ALARM X
Excessive load to the X-motor. Turn off the main power, and turn it on a little later.
1. Check friction of X (Y) -axis motor.
2. Check if media attaches on the platen.
Media Attachment to the Platen ( See 7.2.2 ).
3. Replace the X (Y)-axis motor.
4. Replace the regenerative resistivity PCB assy.
(See 6.5.2)
41
----- ERROR 41 -----
MOTOR ALARM Y
Excessive load to the Y-motor.
42
----- ERROR 42 -----
X OVER CURRENT
Over current error of X-motor is detected.
43 ----- ERROR 43 -----
Y OVER CURRENT
Over current error of Y-motor is detected.
45
----- ERROR 45 -----
CAPPING : PARAMETER
An error occurred in capping control.
(Improper parameter adjusted value)
1. Make sure that the adjusting value of
[#ADJUST] -> [CAPPING] is set correctly.
Error
No.
R.1.2
1.2
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
46 ----- ERROR 46 -----
WIPER
An error occurred in wiper control. Turn off the main power, and turn it on a little later.
1. Check that the wiper sensor functions properly
with [#TEST] -> [SENSOR TEST].
2. Check that the wiper motor functions properly
with [#TEST] -> [MOTOR TEST].
3. Check whether the guide rail of the wiper is not
clogged with ink. (Does the wiper move
smoothly?)
4. Replace the wiper sensor.
5. Replace the step motor. (See 6.4.6)
6. Replace the station PCB assy. (See 6.5.6)
50
----- ERROR 50 -----
MEDIA DETECT
Media could not be detected. Turn off the main power, and turn it on a little later.
1. Carry out [#TEST] -> [SENSOR TEST] ->
[PR SENSOR] in this order, and check whether
the PR sensor functions normally.
2. Clean the PR sensor, and adjust its mounting
position or replace it.
3. Replace the cutter slider PCB assy. (See 6.5.10)
51 ----- ERROR 51 -----
Y-ORIGIN
Y-origin could not be detected. Turn off the main power, and turn it on a little later.
1. Check that the Y-origin sensor functions
properly with [#TEST] -> [SENSOR TEST].
2. Replace the Y-origin sensor.
3. Replace the station PCB assy. (See 6.5.6)
70
E70 FPGA
FPGA Configuration fails. (This does not occur during the customer use.)
71 E71 SD-RAM Abnormal operation in SD-RAM. (This does not occur during the customer use.)
1. Make sure that PRAM PCB assy is connected
properly.
2. Replace the PRAM PCB assy. (See 6.5.3)
74
E74 TRANS DATA
Received data is not Version Up file (This does not occur during the customer use.)
1. Make sure that the ROM file is transmitted.
80
E80 ROM0 ERASE
ROM0 Erase error (This does not occur during the customer use.)
1. Replace the main PCB assy. (See 3.4.1) 81 E81 ROM1 ERASE ROM1 Erase error
82
E82 h'--------
ROM0 Write error
83
E83 h'--------
ROM1 Write error
84 E84 h'-------- Verify error
85
E85 ROM HASH
Hash check error
90
E90 h'--------
ROM Erase error
92
E92 h'--------
ROM Write error
95 E95 MODE SHIFT Transition to the version up mode is not allowed.
99
E99 VERSION DATA
Wrong version data
120
---- ERROR 120 ----
ENVIRONMENT TEMP(LO)
The ambient temperature is outside of the warranty.
(The temperature is too low.)
Adjust the ambient temperature of the printer.
Operation under the temperature among the guaran-
teed operation temperature range is recommended.
121
---- ERROR 121 ----
ENVIRONMENT TEMP(HI)
The ambient temperature is outside of the warranty.
(The temperature is too high.)
144 ---- ERROR 144 ----
CARTRIDGE SET !
There are slots where cartridges are not inserted. Insert cartridges into the slots, since the slots may
dry up when left without them inside and the ink
may become unusable.
Give instruction (to the customers) that, when they
leave the slot without cartridge in it, its needle may
dry up and becomes unable to absorb the ink.
Error
No.
R.1.3
1.3
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ERROR COMMAND (This does not occur during the customer use.)
ERROR PARAMETER
(This does not occur during the customer use.)
1. Check that PRM file and parameter data
correspond to version of the printer.
ERROR DATA
(This does not occur during the customer use.)
ERR PRM.SHORTAGE (This does not occur during the customer use.)
1. Check that PRM file and parameter data
correspond to version of the printer.
170
---- ERROR 170 ----
CUTTER LOCK
The cutter head cannot be fixed in the standby
position, and connector changeover cannot be
made.
1. Set cut system parameter No. 37 CLKAJST
to 0 and turn power on.
2. Check the operation of the C connecting hook
or replace it.
3. Check the operation of the change lever or
replace it.
---- ERROR 170 ----
PRINT HEAD LOCK
The print head cannot be fixed in the standby posi-
tion, and connector changeover cannot be made.
Check the operation of the P head connecting hook
or replace it.
180
---- ERROR 180 ----
CUTTER JOINT
The cutter head or the connector came off during
the operation.
Check the vicinity of the connection magnet or
replace it.
---- ERROR 180 ----
PRINT HEAD JOINT
The print head or the connector came off during the
operation.
181
---- ERROR 181 ----
PR POSITION
Media could not be detected.
(The location of the pinch roller is not appropriate.)
Set the pinch roller in the proper place.
200 ---- ERROR 200 ----
HEAD MEMORY (----)
An error occurred in head unit memory. Turn off the main power, and turn it on a little later.
1. Check the head memory cable.
2. Replace the head memory.
202
---- ERROR 202 ----
DEVICE CONSTRUCTION
Head unconnected.
FFC broken or poor connection.
An error occurred in head unit memory.
1. Refer to 7.2.3 Electrical Troubleshooting, and
replace the following parts if it has damaged.
.Check the head and head FFC cable.
.Check the HDC FFC cable.
.Replace the ink slider PCB assy. (See 6.5.9)
.Replace the main PCB assy. (See 3.4.1)
2. Check the head memory cable.
3. Replace the head memory.
203
---- ERROR 203 ----
SDRAM SIZE
The printer is not provided with the required size of
SD-RAM.
205
---- ERROR 205 ----
47V HEAD VOLTAGE
An excessive current flowed in the 47 V circuit of
the print head, thus the fuse was blown.
Refer to Electrical Troubleshooting ( See 7.2.3 ),
and replace the following parts if it has damaged.
1. Replace the head FFC and HDC FFC cable.
2. Replace the head.
3. Replace the fuse. (Main PCB F13)(See 6.5.17)
206 ---- ERROR 206 ----
MAIN PCB
The installed main PCB is not the one for CJV. Replace the main PCB with the one for exclusive
use with CJV.
Error
No.
R.1.2
1.2
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
207 ---- ERROR 207 ----
SLEW RATE
Trouble with COM wave 1. Restart
2. Upload event log
3. Report what it happened to
SIGN&GRAPHIC, SG DESIGN GROUP
---- ERROR 207 ----
OVERFLOW
---- ERROR 207 ----
UNDERFLOW
208 **** ERROR208 ****
CHECK MAIN PCB ID
The device type ID of the main PCB is different. Check the device type ID switch of the main PCB.
211
---- ERROR 211----
HeaterTEMP(--/--/--)
An abnormal temperature of the media heater was
detected.
2. Replace the power supply PCB assy.
(See 6.5.1)
3. Replace the relevant platen cover with a new
one.
---- ERROR 211 ----
HeadWARM.TEMP.(----)
An abnormal temperature of the head heating
heater was detected.
1. Make sure that the connection to the main FPC
is correct.
2. Replace the relevant head heating heater with a
new one.
---- ERROR 211 ----
HeadWARM.BREAK(----)
The head heating heater is disconnected.
* This error is never displayed when no head warm
heater is installed.
1. Replace the relevant head heating heater with a
new one.
---- ERROR 211 ----
HeadWARM.THERM(----)
Trouble has occurred with the thermistor of the
head heating heater.
* This error is never displayed when no head warm
heater is installed.
250
---- ERROR 250 ----
Y COORDINATES
An error was detected during scanning operation. Turn off the main power, and turn it on a little later.
If such an abnormality recurs, check the uploaded
parameter and the status of use, then report them to
the Development Division.
251 ---- ERROR 251 ----
SYSTEM ERROR
System error Turn off the main power, and turn it on a little later.
1. Check whether no abnormality is found by
examining the memories (Main.FROM).
2. In case the error recurs, check the uploaded
parameter and the status of use, and then report
them to the Development Division.
Error
No.
R.1.3
1.3
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Warning Messages
1.2
Rev.
List of Warning Messages (1/3)
No. Indication on LCD Cause Remedy
1
-- NO MEDIA --
No media was detected. If the warning is displayed again even when the media is set,
check the followings.
1. Check that the R paper sensor functions properly with
[#TEST] -> [SENSOR TEST].
2. Make sure that the cables are connected properly.
3. Replace the media sensor.
2
!EXCHANGE BATTERY
Exhaustion of RTC battery was detected. Replace the battery with a new one having the same model
number.
3
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
!Replace a WIPER
Time to replace the wiper in the capping
station with a new one has come.
(The wiping count has reached the speci-
fied value.)
Check whether the user replaced the wiper.
([MAINTENANCE] -> [ST.MAINTENANCE])
4 <LOCAL.1> [#01]
!CONFIRM TEST PRINT
Sleep refresh or cleaning was not per-
formed when power was kept off for 72
hours or more.
Perform TEST DRAW, and check for omitted nozzles.If noz-
zles are omitted, perform cleaning.If nozzle missing is seri-
ous, execute [ST.MAINTENANCE] -> [NOZZLE WASH]
for maintenance.
5
PRE PRT AFT
BREAK --C --C
The media heater is disconnected.
(This example shows that preheater is
disconnected.)
1. Check that the media heater functions properly with
[#TEST] -> [HEATER TEST].
2. Make sure that the cables are connected properly.
3. Make sure that fuse of power supply PCB assy is not
blown out.
4. Replace the power supply PCB assy (See 6.5.9) or main
PCB assy (See 3.4.1) with a new one.
The heater PCB assy is for the pre/post heater, and the
power supply PCB assy is for the print heater.
6
PRE PRT AFT
THERM --C --C
The thermistor of a media heater is defec-
tive.
(This example shows that the thermistor
of preheater is defective.)
1. Check that the media heater functions properly with
[#TEST] -> [HEATER TEST].
2. Make sure that connection of thermistor is correct.
7 <LOCAL.1> [#01]
NEAR END MCYK----
Ink for one supply path has been nearly
used up.
Printing is permitted without replacing the ink cartridge (until
INK END is displayed). However, the printer returns to local
mode every completion of printing one file.
8
-REMOTE.1- [#01]
NEAR END MCYK---
9
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
INK END ----KYCM
Ink for one supply path has been com-
pletely used up.
Replace the cartridge corresponding to the color displayed.
10 -REMOTE.1- [#01]
INK END ----KYCM
11
<LOCAL.1> [#01]
!CARTRIDGE ----KYCM
Ink for one supply path is not yet set, or
unusable ink is being set.
Replace or set the cartridges corresponding to the colors dis-
played.
12
-REMOTE.1- [#01]
!CARTRIDGE ----KYCM
13 <LOCAL.1> !CAR [#01] There is a problem with installed ink car-
tridges.
Displayed only when 4-color cartridges
are installed.
Check the content of the warning by displaying it using the
guidance function.
LOCAL>[ENTER]>[FUNCTION]
14
-REMOTE.1- !CAR
[#01]
15
<LOCAL.1> !WSH [#01]
There is a problem with the maintenance
washing liquid. (Displayed only in cut
mode)
Not set.
Any cartridge other than that for main-
tenance washing liquid is set.
The maintenance washing liquid has
been used up.
Replace the maintenance washing liquid cartridge with a new
one.
*REMOTE.1* !WSH [#01]
16
<LOCAL.1> !RTN [#01]
Periodical operation cannot be executed,
since the connection unit is not connected
to the print head.
Start origin setting in print mode, and change the connection
of the connection unit.
Or perform the relevant periodical operation by manual oper-
ation.
*REMOTE.1* !RTN [#01]
17
<LOCAL.1> !TNK [#01]
The waste ink tank is nearly full.
(Displayed only in cut mode)
Replace the waste ink tank with a new one. Execute [MAIN-
TENANCE] -> [InkTankReplace].
*REMOTE.1* !TNK [#01]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
18
<LOCAL.1> !CAR [#01]
INK REMAIN K-------
The ink of the 600cc package has been
completely used up.
Reset the cartridge and set the amount of remaining ink. If the
ink that can be used is remaining, the warning is cancelled
and the cartridge can be used continuously. If the ink that can
be used is not remaining,the warning is not cancelled.
19
REINSERT CARTRIDGE
End sensor is detected with enough ink
remaining
Reinstall appropriate cartridge
Check or replace the end sensor if it is detected after reinstal-
lation
20
!WASTE TANK
The waste ink tank is nealy full.
(The waste ink count has reaced the spec-
ified value.)
Reinstall appropriate cartridge
Check or replace the end sensor if it is detected after reinstal-
lation
21
!Wash Liquid END
Emptied washing liquid cartridge was
detected.
Replace the maintenance washing liquid cartridge with a new
one. If the problem still cannot be solved, check the follow-
ings.
1. Check that the cartridge end sensor works properly with
[#TEST] -> [WASH CARTRIDGE].
2. If it does not work properly, replace the sensor or IO
PCB assy with a new one.
22
!WashLiquidCart.NONE
The washing liquid cartridge has not been
installed.
23
!WRONG WASH CART.
Trouble with washing liquid cartridge has
been detected.
(Ex.Ink cartridge is set)
Install the maintenance washing liquid cartridge.
24
-- Washing liquid --
-- un-filling up. --
Maintenance washing liquid has not been
supplied.
Supply the maintenance washing liquid.
(Execute [MAINTENANCE] -> [HD.MAINTENANCE] ->
[FILL UP INK].)
25 -- OFFSCALE -- The cutting data exceeds the effective
cutting area.
Or the machine has stopped after cutting
the media up to its end normally.
Use a larger size of media, decrease the amount of data or
execute the divided cutting function.
26
-- END COPY --
The machine has terminated copying
after completion of one sheet copying,
since the data received contains the origin
updating command.
The cutting of two or more sheets is not allowed.
To have the machine cut two or more sheets, change the set-
ting on the host computer beforehand.
27 -- DIVISION -- 5s The machine has finished the cutting cor-
responding to a division of the data that
exceeds the media width, using the divi-
sion cut function, and is now waiting for
the receipt of the next data.
When the machine does not receive any data from the host
computer within ten seconds, it will recognize the data has
ended.
Then the machine will perform the frame cutting and mark
cutting and return to local mode.
28
-- END DIVISION --
Displayed in any of the following cases:
Media width is 1 cm or less.
Sample cutting data exceeds the media
width.
Two-point axis alignment is set to ON.
Marks have already detected.
Division cutting is not allowed.
29
COPY SKIP
A mark could not be detected during con-
tinuous copying. (One pattern is skipped.)
There is no problem if the marks are successfully detected
after skipping one pattern.
If marks cannot be detected successively by five patterns or
more, [ERROR 36-C MARK DETECT] is displayed.
30
PAUSE REM/END
Since [REMOTE] was pressed during
mark detection, the detection operation
has come to a halt.
Press [REMOTE] again to resume detection operation.
Or press [END] to terminate the operation.
31
MEDIA SKEW <ENT>
The deviation of the media exceeded the
setting value of SKEW CHECK.
Set the media again and press [ENTER].
32
MEDIA EXCHANGE
Replacing the media is being waited for.
(During continuous copying on cut
sheets)
Change leaf media (cut sheets) and resume continuous copy-
ing.
33
MEDIA END REM/END
The media end was detected during mark
detection or during cutting in roll media.
The end of the roll media has been reached, thus cutting can-
not be continued.
Press [END] and replace the media with new one.
The media is floating. Set the media properly so that it is free of floating, and press
[REMOTE] to resume cutting.
A strong light hits the rear of the
machine.
Intercept the light, and press [REMOTE] to resume cutting.
R.1.2
1.2
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Possible to confirm warning below on local guidance
LOCAL> [ENTER](ink remaining quantity is displayed)>[FUNCTION]
34 INK NEAR END Ink in the cartridge is running out. (Print or use-up cleaning is available)
35
INK END
The ink of the ink cartridge has been
completely used up.
(Use-up cleaning is available)
36 NON-ORIGINAL INK The ink cartridge is not MIMAKI genu-
ine.
Replace the cartridge generating the warning with a new one.
If the problem still cannot be solved, check the followings.
1. Check whether the process of [#TEST] -> [INK
CARTRIDGE] -> [INK-IC CHECK] can be carried out
normally.
2. ID Contact PCB CN032 Assy. (See 6.5.15)
37
WRONG INK IC
The IC chip of the ink cartridge cannot be
read normally.
38
Kind of INK
It is different types of ink from the ink
filling up with the machine.
Check the ink type of the cartridge generating the warning.
39
Color of INK
It is not the color should be installed. Check the ink color of the cartridge generating the warning.
40
WRONG CARTRIDGE
There is trouble with an installed ink car-
tridge.
Check the cartridge generating the warning.
41
NO CARTRIDGE
An ink cartridge has not been installed in
the slot.
Install an appropriate ink cartridge in the slot generating the
warning. If the problem still cannot be solved, check the fol-
lowings.
1. Check that the cartridge exist/non-exist sensor functions
properly with [#TEST] -> [INK CARTRIDGE].
2. If it does not work properly, replace the sensor or X-axis
motor relay PCB assy with a new one.
42
Expiration
The specified expiration date of an ink
cartridge has passed.
Make sure if the month of machine is correct on [MACHINE
SETUP2]>[TIME SET] if the Warning is displayed within
expiry month described on cartridge.
Refer to 1.3.10 Expiry month and extension of expiry month
for ink
43 Expiration:1MONTH The specified expiration date of an ink
cartridge has passed. (One month has
passed after the specified expiration
date.)
44
Expiration:2MONTH
The specified expiration date of an ink
cartridge has passed. (Two months have
passed after the specified expiration
date.)
45
COMPLETELY EXPIRED
The specified expiratio date of ink car-
tridge has passed. (Six month has passed
after the specified expiration date.)
Not extend expiry month.
46
EXPIRED INK IN USE
Cartridge extended expiry month.
47 INK REMAIN ZERO
---- ----
Remaining amount of ink in an ink car-
tridge is zero.
(Used the prescribed quantity of use-up
cleaning.)
Replace the cartridge generating the warning with a new one.
48
REINSERT CARTRIDGE
The end sensor was detected even though
enough quantity was remaining.
Install appropriate cartridge. If the warning is not hidden,
check or replace the sensor on [#TEST]>[INK CAR-
TRIDGE].
49
Check the Wnozzle
condition. <ENT>
When SS 21 white ink is used, the mes-
sage of prompting you to perform test
printing is displayed for keeping the noz-
zle status be normal.
Perform WHITE CHK. of test printing.
50 PERFORM SPOT COLOR
MAINTENANCE? <ENT>
When silver and white ink of ES3 ink are
used, the message of prompting you to
perform special color maintenance for
preventing color heterogeneity due to set-
tling down of pigment is displayed.
Perform spot color maintenance.
R.1.3
1.3
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > Trouble with No Messages
1.0
Rev.
7.1.4 Trouble with No Messages
Outline
This explains the troubles where no Error nor Warning messages displays.
Trouble list
No. Phenomenon Contents or Causes Solution
1 The machine generates strange
noise while operating.
1. Y belt noise 7.2.1
2. X or Y motor hunting
2 The power cannot be turned on 1. Head, FFC, main PCB, or slider PCB trouble 7.2.3
2. The power supply PCB damage
3. Poor connection of the connector
3 Abnormal discharging 1. Head, FFC, main PCB, or slider PCB trouble 7.2.3
4 Y belt derailment or damage 1. Y-T pulley tilt 7.2.4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions
7. Troubleshooting
7.1
7.2
the Malfunctions
7.3
Checksheet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Y Drive Belt Noise
1.0
Rev.
Outline
To ensure the cutting quality, this machine uses the white belt for Y drive with unstretchable and good material in
mechanical property.
For the belt, a noise like a metallic sound may be generated due to the friction between the belt edge and the swaging
flange of the pulley. To reduce the noise, grease up the belt using specified grease.
It is also effective for Y belt damage.
Point to be checked
1. Check the Y-T Pulley Assy (Y Tension Pulley) condition.
Perform [FUNCTION]->[#TEST]->[MOTOR TEST]->[Y
SERVO MOTOR], and check there is no deformation on the
swaging flange of the pulley while the Y is driving.
2. If the swaging flange seems to move up and down while the Y
is driving, or if there is a space between the swaging flange part
and the tooth part, the belt may fracture or a problem of the
transport function may occur.
3. If no such problems as mentioned above, grease up by follow-
ing the instruction below Procedure.
There is no difference in performance between MG-A1-GU and SEALUB L101. (Checked up to 1500H )
In duration test with a simulated damage, greased machine's durability is more than 12 times higher than
no-greased one.
Y-T Pulley Assy
Y-T Pulley Assy
Tooth part
Swaging Flange
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Procedure
When using the recommended spray grease [SEALUB L101]
1. Set the long nozzle attachment to the spray grease.
2. Move the joint unit to the left end of the platen.
3. While moving the white belt to the right (rotating the pulley),
spray the grease to the Y-T pulley (Y tension pulley).
4. When the joint unit reaches the right end, move the white belt to
the left and spray the grease to the Y drive pulley.
At work, make sure not to attach fingerprints or oil or grease to the linear encoder scale and take a great
care not to break or scratch it. (If dirt is attached, clean it with mild detergent.)
In case of using spray grease, the mist may attach to the media. Check there is no media around or on the
machine before operation.
Guideline for Spraying
Spray the grease while moving the white belt so that
the joint unit will move from one end to the other at
the speed of 30cm/s.
White Belt
Y-T Pulley ASSY
Spray Grease
Long Nozzle
Attachment
Y Drive Pulley ASSY
Spray Grease
Long Nozzle
Attachment
White Belt
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When using MG-A1-GU grease
1. Move the joint unit to the left end of the platen.
2. Spread a thin layer of the grease on the upper and the lower
faces of the belt with your finger.
3. Move the joint unit to the right end of the platen.
4. Spread a thin layer of the grease on the upper and the lower
faces of the belt with your finger.
Good Example Bad Example
Greased too much.
Spread or wipe off the extra grease.
Belt edge (upper face)
Belt edge (lower face)
Spread a thin layer of the grease on the whole spread-
able area of the white belt edges (on both upper/ lower
face) with your finger.
Be careful not to spread too much that will spatter the
mist of the grease.
Grease on the belt edge
(upper and lower faces)
Joint Unit
Grease on the belt edge
(upper and lower faces)
Joint Unit
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual >Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Media Attachment to the
1.0
Rev.
Outline
Some media may attach to the platen and cause the X overcurrent error.
To avoid the problem, tape the Niftron tape on to the platen as the following procedures.
Tools
Niftron tape (Model: No.973UL-S 0.13mm x 10mm x 10m, company: NITTO DENKO)
Scissors
Ethanol (alcohol) or diluted mild detergent to remove dirt and oil.
Paper towel to remove dirt and oil. (lint-free towel such as BEMCOT)
Procedure
1. Remove oil on the platen with ethanol or diluted mild detergent.
(Use BEMCOT)
2. Tape the Niftron tape (5 places, cut with scissors) on the platen.
Make sure to turn off the main switch to prevent unexpected movements of the printer..
Niftron Tape
Be careful not to cover the vacuum hole with the tape.
It is acceptable that the tape touches the edge of the
hole.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3. To tape the Niftron tape on the left edge of the platen, move the
left media retainer to the left end.
4. Tape the Niftron tape, and then cut it at the 5 mm right from the
media retainer placed on the left end.
5. To tape the Niftron tape on the right edge of the platen, move
the right media retainer to the right end.
6. Tape the Niftron tape, and then cut it along the left end of the
slit line.
5mm
Slit line
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual >Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Media Attachment to the
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Electrical Troubleshooting
1.0
Rev.
Outline
The following errors will be caused by breakage of PCB, and some of them may also break the surrounding PCB by
breakage of the head.
This explains the causes and handling for the electrical troubles.
Related troubles :
Abnormal firing (simultaneously firing of no firing from a certain nozzle line)
The power would not be turned on
ERROR 07 HEAD or VOLTAGE
ERROR 50 MEDIA DETECT or MEDIA POSITION (Only of JV33)
ERROR 200 HEAD MEMORY
ERROR 202 DEVICE CONSTRUCTION
ERROR 205 47V HEAD VOLTAGE (Only of CJV30 and modified JV33 PCB)
ERROR 207 SLEW RATE or OVERFLOW or UNDERFLOW
Causes and solutions of the print head breakage
Cause of head/PCB damage Countermeasures
1 Disconnection of HDC_FFC Fix moving part of the HDC FFC
CJV30: Applied to all machines.
JV33: Please fix FFC of following machines. Please refer to "JV33 Quality
Information No.14" (Japanese only) to fix the FFC.
CJV30-130 : from G0704001 to G0805345
CJV30-160 : from G1704001 to G1805329
Please refer to the documents below for more detail.
CJV30 Maintenance Manual (5.2.5 Checking conduction of HDC FFC
COM line)
CJV30 Maintenance Manual (5.2.6 Checking conduction of HDC FFC
data line)
2 Disconnection of Head FFC and contact
failure by wrong insertion of FFC
When replacing heads, replace the Head FFC ASSY as well. Insert the FFC
straight and visually check if they are attached without misalignment.
Also the function to check the connection of heads when turning on the printer
has been added from following firmware version.
JV33-130/160/260 (TS3) : F/W Ver.3.20 or later
JV33-130/160/260BS : F/W Ver.3.00 or later
CJV33-60/100/130/160 (TPC) : F/W Ver.2.00 or later
CJV33-60/100/130/160BS : F/W Ver.2.00 or later
If [ERROR 202 DEVICE CONSTRUCTION] occur, it might be a FFC trou-
ble or head/PCB may be damaged.
Please refer to the documents below for troubleshooting.
CJV30 Maintenance Manual (4.5.1 Handing of FFC)
CJV30 Maintenance Manual (7.2.3 Electrical Troubleshooting)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3 COM noise when turn off the machine and
trouble of power sequence.
CJV30: Corrected in Firmware ver.1.0 or later / JV33: Corrected in Firmware
ver.1.8 or later.
Note: Do not do the followings even if the applied firmware is installed.
COM noise can be made and it will cause damage. However, if it is necessary
to do the operation mentioned (b), please leave the machine 3 minutes or more
before turning on the power.
(a) Turning off the main power while "BOOT" is showing.
(b)Turning off the main power after "F-ROM" error occurred.
4 Static electricity attack Modified Head earth plate (M507834_02) to prevent head attack by static
electricity charged in media when media jam occurred.
However, static electricity may attacks to the slider when the operator touched
the slider part to remove the media.
Please advice to the customers that discharge by touching the metal part of the
machine other than slider before touching the slider or head, and remove the
media gently without making static electricity.
5 Replace head associated parts in the condi-
tion of electric charge remains.
When replace the head and PCB with electric charge remains in 42V circuit,
head and PCB damage may increase.
Before replacement, make sure to check if electric charge is not remaining
inside of PCB when turning off the power each time.
For replacement procedure and precautions, please refer to the attached docu-
ment "Electric charge checking when replace the head and PCB."
Also to shorten the replacement time, resistance has been added to the Main
PCB and countermeasure of electric discharge also been added.
Cause of head/PCB damage Countermeasures
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Check Flow of the PCB breakage
Problem occurred
Check HDC FFC disconnection, and
replace the disconnected FFC.
See (5.2.5) (5.2.6).
Finish
Determine COM short circuit.
(See5.2.1)
NG
OK
NG
OK
A
Check damage of Print head.
(See5.2.2)
Check damage of
Main PCB ASSY.
(See5.2.3)
Check damage of
Ink Slider PCB.
(See5.2.4)
Replace Head
and Head FFC.
Return to A
Replace Main
PCB or F13 fuse.
Replace Ink
Slider PCB.
NG
NG
OK
OK
Return to A
Return to A
Return to A
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Y Drive Belt Damage
1.0
Rev.
Outline
The driven pulley tilt over the acceptable range caused by assembly error may slip the Y belt onto the flange and
damage the belt. When this problem occurred, replace the belt and adjust the pulley tilt with shim.
We also recommend you to check this at the regular maintenance.
Tools
Phillips screwdriver
Shim: Y-T Spacer L0.4 (M511789)
Procedure
1. Remove the covers in the following order.
1. ICU Cover 30
2. Maintenance Cover L30
3. Left Cover 30
4. C Y-T Cover
2. Move the head in full width from the right (left) to the left
(right) manually. Check the Y-belt condition on the Y-T pulley.
When the Y-belt has gap on both sides, or when the belt moves
up and down in conjunction with the head, adjustment with the
shim is not required.
Be sure to turn OFF the MAIN power to prevent an unexpected movement of the printer while perform-
ing these procedures.
1.ICU Cover 30 2.Maintenance Cover L30
3.Left Cover 30
4.C Y-T Cover
Gap
Gap
Cautions for adding the shim
Make sure to add only one piece of the shim. Adding more than two pieces may deform the Y-T pulley
BKT ASSY.
Additional adjustment is not required because the shim is made to fulfill a proper alignment with one.
The alignment cannot be measured on site. Follow the instructions below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3. In case that the Y belt is raised on the Y-T pulley.
Loosen the belt tension, loosen the all screws fixing the Y-T
pulley BKT ASSY to the Y-bar, then attach the shim to the
upper side.
4. In case that the Y belt is lowered on the Y-T pulley.
Loosen the belt tension, loosen the all screws fixing the Y-T
pulley BKT ASSY to the Y-bar, then attach the shim to the
lower side.
5. Press the Y-T pulley BKT ASSY to the Y-bar and fix the
screws.
Readjust the belt tension and attach the removed covers.
Gap
Attach the shim to touch both the rear and the front
side of the Y bar.
Attach the adhesive face of the shim to the upper
side of the Y-T pulley BKT ASSY.
Do not attach the shim to the Y-bar side.
Gap
Bad example
Shim
adhesive
face
Contacted with Y-bar
Gap
Attach the shim to touch both the rear and the front
side of the Y bar.
Attach the adhesive face of the shim to the lower
side of the Y-T pulley BKT ASSY.
Do not attach the shim to the Y-bar side.
Gap
Shim
adhesive
face
Contacted with Y-bar
Bad example
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Y Drive Belt Damage
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Heater temperature does not going up
1.0
Rev.
Outline
If the heater temperature could not rise up to setting value or [BREAK] displayed, it is possibility of power supply
PCB burnout or fuse blowout. Blowout also can be checked by measuring resistance value at the both ends of fuse
with tester when it has difficulty with visually checking.
Heater disconnection or faulty connection, disconnection or faulty connection of control signal and Main PCB dam-
age also think as a possibility why the heater temperature cannot go up.
Follow the directions below to find out the faulty points and deal with proper countermeasure.
Working procedure (Test)
1. Turing off the sub and main power switches in order and wait a
while to reboot the machine.
2. Operate [# TEST TEST]-[HEATER TEST] to check if media
heater is working normally.
3. When [BREAK] displayed, follow the directions below to find
out trouble point.
Working procedure (Checking of Power Supply PCB)
1. Remove the Power Box Cover.
2. Check if no electric charge is remaining in the PCB.
Refer to the "4.5.2 Electric charge checking when replace the
head/PCB"
3. Check RLY1, 3 and 4 of the power supply PCB.
If PCB brounout as shown in the picture on the left, replace the
PCB.
FUNCTION
#TEST <ENT>
#TEST
HEATER TEST <ent>
#HEATER TEST
TEMPERATURE <ent>
PRE PRT AFT
35C 35C 35C
[FUNCTION]
Make sure to restart operation after checking that no electric charge remains in the PCB.
F4,F5
RLY1,3,4
Heater BOX junction
cable1 Assy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4. Check F4 and F5 of the power supply PCB.
If PCB brounout as shown in the pocture on the left, replace the
PCB.
5. If you cannot operate visual checking, measure the resistance of
F4 from the back side of PCB as shown in the picture on the
left. Make sure to have resistance value is 5O or less.
Replace the PCB if resistance value is more than 5O.
6. Check F5 in a same way as F4 to check the resistance value is
5O or less.
Relace the PCB if resistance value is more than 5O.
Fuse F4
Fuse F5
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Working procedure (check disconnection)
1. Check the heater disconnection and faulty connection.
Measure the resistant value of heater BOX junction cable 1
using tester probe. (refer to a picture on the left)
Measured resistance value has no problem if the value is in
range as below.
Rear heater (Blue) : 190-240O
Print heater (White) : 120-160O
After heart (Black) : 110-150O
2. Check disconnection and faulty connection of Heater control
signal.
Measure the resistance value using PC (Photocoupler) of power
supply PCB and CN5 of the main PCB.
Following diagram shows measurement place and value.
Working procedure (Checking of Main PCB)
1. If all procedures did not work to solve the problem of tempera-
ture rising, it is a possibility of damage in Main PCB.
Replace the Main PCB and recheck if temperature enables to
read correctly or not.
Insert Red probe
Insert Black probe
Connector of the Heater BOX junction cable 1 ASSY
Main PCB (CN5)
Power Supply PCB
PC9
PC8
PC7
Power Supply PCB Main PCB Measurement value
PC9-2 pin CN5-1 pin 5O or less
PC_IC Pin position
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Checksheet
7. Troubleshooting
7.1
7.2
the Malfunctions
7.3
Checksheet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > PCB Damage Checksheet
1.0
Rev.
Please fill out this checksheet to search failure sources of head and PCB damage.
We would appreciate your taking time to complete this checksheet
Please confirm the machine which has had countermeasure or not.
Some countermeasure are not completed. ........................................Work on uncomplied countermeasure.
Complied countermeasure. .................................................................Fill out following A) through E) and attach to the Damage Report.
A>Fill out the machine information,
B> Conditions when trouble occurred.
1. Confirmation for countermeasure of the selected models.
JV33-130/160, TS3-1600
Firmware Version 4.00 or later.
Main PCB revision label : [E104853-*1 Pb/F] or [E105997-A Pb/F] (* = A to G)
Completed countermeasure for HDC FFC disconnection of movable parts.
JV33-130BS/160BS
Main PCB revision label : [E105454-*1 Pb/F] or [E105998-A Pb/F] (* = A to G)
JV33-260, TS3-2600
JV33-260BS
CJV30-60/100/130/160, CJV30-60BS/100BS/130BS/160BS, TPC-1000

Damage Date) Installation Date) Serial Number Ink Type Ink Set
SS21 ES3 BS
Other : [ ]
4 color 6 +W color
6 color Other : [ ]
1. Check the conditions below.
Unable to turn ON the machine.

LCD light do not turn on.
LCD light is on but nothing displayed.
Abnormal ink firing.

Ink firing with particular nozzle line as once.
No ink firing with particular nozzle line.
Error displayed on LCD pannel.

Check the Error Code/Message displayed on LCD as below.
Also fill in the timing and frequency of error occurrence. Ex. [Everytime occur at test drawing]
Error code/Message Occurred [Timing/Frequency]
ERROR 07
HEAD
VOLTAGE
ERROR 50
MEDIA DETECT
MEDIA SET POSITION
ERROR 205 47V HEAD VOLTAGE
ERROR 207
OVERFLOW
UNDERFLOW
SLEW RATE
Other (describe problem specifically)

2. How and in which condition the trouble occurred?
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C>Conditions before trouble occurred.
D>Please fill in replaced parts and replacement order.
E> Please write down below any advice or comment.
1. Please check and fill in the followings if items applied to the condition before trouble occurred.
Operate normally with no problems.
Nozzle dropout/Ink deflection/Abnormal firing start to occur.
Electric power failure or instant blackout occurred.
Sometimes Error and Warning message appeared.

Check error code and message listed as below.
Also fill in the timing and frequency of error occurrence. Ex. [occurred sometimes while printing]
Error code/Message Occurred [Timing/Frequency]
ERROR 07
HEAD
VOLTAGE
ERROR 50
MEDIA DETECT
MEDIA SET POSITION
ERROR 205 47V HEAD VOLTAGE
ERROR 207
OVERFLOW
UNDERFLOW
SLEW RATE
ERROR 40 MOTOR ALARM X
ERROR 41 MOTOR ALARM Y
ERROR 42 X OVER CURRENT
ERROR 43 Y OVER CURRENT
Other (describe problem specifically)

2. Please write conditions or phenomenon in mind before trouble occurred.
Replacement Parts Order Solved Unsolved Condition changed [describe conditions below]
Head [ ]
Head FFC ASSY [ ]
HDC FFC ASSY [ ]
PCB [ ]
Main PCB
PCB No. Before replacement [ ] After replacement [ ]
Slider PCB [ ]
Power supply PCB [ ]
Fuse of Main PCB [ ]
Others Parts
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > PCB Damage Checksheet
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Basic Operation
8. Operation Flow
8.1
Basic Operation
8.2
Print Mode
8.3
Cut Mode
8.4
Common Setting
8.5
Service Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Basic Operation > Start
1.0
Rev.
8.1.1 Start
CJV30-100 V1.00
[REMOTE]
BOOT
CJV30-100 V1.00
P.1.0.H.1.0
When service mode is open
F/W UPDATING
-TRANSMIT START-
F/W UPDATING
--RECEIVE--
F/W UPDATING
-DOWNLOADING-
F/W UPDATING
MECA LOAD [v-.--]
Firmware update function
Ready for ROM data reception ROM data being received ROM data being overwritten F/W update completed
[] + []
UP&DOWNLOAD
READY!
--- UPLOADING --- --- DOWNLOADING --- UP&DOWNLOAD END
POWER OFF
Parameter Up/Download
Ready for Up/Download Uploading Downloading
Up/Download successfully
completed
[REMOTE] + [END]
[] + []
SYSTEM PARAMETER
000:COMP. X = 0
System parameter input mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Basic Operation > Initial Filling
1.0
Rev.
CJV30-100 V1.00
BOOT
CJV30-100 V1.00
P.1.0.H.1.0
When service mode is open
INK SPECIFICATION
SOLVENT-INK spec.
* When ink filling has not been performed
Choose an ink set.
4-Color(MMCCYYKK)
12345678
DISCHARGE
00:00
Set all fill-cart
12345678
FILLING UP
00:00
Remove:Cartridges
12345678
DISCHARGE
00:00
SS3-4Color
MMCCYYKK
[END] :Quit [] + []: Changes the selection.
[ENTER]: To the next step
[END]: Quit
FILLING UP
00:00
Set:Maint.Wash Liqid FILLING UP
00:00
[END] :To LOCAL
[END] :Quit
<LOCAL.-> [#01]
* When maintenance washing liquid filling has been completed
Filling up isn't yet
May I stop it ? :ent
*1 Quit confirmation screen
[ENTER]: To the ink type select screen
[END]: Quit
[END]: To the quit confirmation
screen *
1
[END]: To the quit confirmation
screen *
1
[] + []: Changes the selection.
[ENTER]: To the next step
[END]: Quit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Basic Operation > Media Detection
1.0
Rev.
8.1.3 Media Detection
Lever down
<LOCAL.-> [#01]
-- PINCH ROLLER --
PINCH ROLLER:No.6to1
>PRINT [MMMMMMM]
CUT [H_____H]
MEDIA SELECT
ROLL< >LEAF
DETECTING MEDIA NOW
PLEASE WAIT
-- MEDIA --
Y=1000 X=----
Input of MediaLength
MEDIA LENGTH = 50.0m

[ENTER]: To the next screen
[]: to
[ENTER]: Displays a screen according
to and settings.
[END]: To the previous screen
[END]/[]/ []:
[]: to
When detection has
been completed Displayed momentarily
To <LOCAL> when MEDIA
RESIDUAL= ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode
8. Operation Flow
8.1
Basic Operation
8.2
Print Mode
8.3
Cut Mode
8.4
Common Setting
8.5
Service Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > LOCAL / REMOTE
1.1
Rev.
<LOCAL.-> [#01]
WIDTH:1000mm
ORIGIN SET UP
0.0 ----
ORIGIN SET UP
-- ORIGIN --
[], [], [], []
MEDIA CUT
<ENT>
MEDIA CUTTING
PLEASE WAIT
[END] :To LOCAL
MEDIA RESIDUAL PRINT
<ENT>
PRINTING
PLEASE WAIT
[END] :To LOCAL
[FUNCTION]
[REMOTE]*
PRE PRT AFT
35C 35C 35C
35C 35C 35C
(OFF OFF OFF)
[HEATER/CUTTER]
TEST PRINT
(SCAN DIR.) <ENT>
-- TEST PRINT --
[TEST PRINT/TEST CUT]
CLEANING
TYPE :NORMAL
CLEANING ACTIVE
00:00
[CLEANING/FEED]
:SOFT
:HARD
:SPOT
DATA CLEAR
<ENT>
-- DATA CLEAR --
[DATA CLEAR]
USER TYPE CHANGE
TYPE (1) -> <2> :ent
[USER TYPE/TOOL]
1 to 4
TEMPERATURE CONTROL!
PLEASE WAIT
PRE PRT AFT
35C 35C 35C
[REMOTE]*
Displayed alternately
-REMOTE.1- [#01]
0.00m
Target temperature reached/ [ENTER]
* Not displayed when target
temperature has been reached
SS21INK MMCCYYKK
REMAIN 99999999
HEAD HEIGHT :Thin
MEDIA WIDTH :1000mm
[ENTER]
CJV30-100 V1.00
MRL-III V1.30
NON-ORIGINAL INK
MMCCYYKK
[FUNCTION]
[] + []: Changes error display
[]: To the next screen
[]: To the previous screen
[END]: To LOCAL
* At occurrence of error
[MODE CHANGE]
Enters CUT MODE
* Not displayed when target
temperature has been reached
When [SPOT] is selected
:SCAN DIR.
:FEED DIR.
:WHITE CHK.
SPOT COLOR SELECT
COLOR :SILVER
WHITE,S&W
REMOVE:INK CARTRIDGE
_S______
* DISCHARGE *
03:00
SHAKE INK CARTEIDGE
:ent
SET:INK CARTRIDGE
_S______
FILLING UP
03:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-REMOTE.1- [#01]
0.00m
-REMOTE.1- [#01]
0.00m
-REMOTE.1- 540x1080
12.Bd.Vd.x2: 0.00m
Data reception
FEED COMPENSATION.
0
FEED COMPENSATION.
0 > 0
[FUNCTION]
SS21INK MMCCYYKK
REMAIN 99999999
[ENTER]
PRE PRT AFT
35C 35C 35C
35C 35C 35C
(OFF OFF OFF)
[HEATER/CUTTER]
-REMOTE.1- 540x1080
NEAR END MCYK
* Displayed alternately when NEAR END is detected
FEED COMPENSATION.
SAVE :ent
<LOCAL.-> [#01]
WIDTH:1000mm
[REMOTE]
* Same as in LOCAL
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > LOCAL / REMOTE
1.1
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > SETUP
1.0
Rev.
8.2.2 SETUP
FUNCTION
SETUP <ENT>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
:TYPE.1 to 4
ENDS:HIGH [H_____H]
INNER:OFF No.6to1
ENDS:HIGH [H_____H]
INNER:OFF No.6to1
SETUP
SELECT :TYPE.1
[1]
PINCH ROLLER <ent>
[FUNCTION]: To the next screen [FUNCTION]: To the previous screen
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]MEDIA COMP.
PRINT START :ent
PRINTING
PLEASE WAIT
[1]
MEDIA COMP. <ent>
[1]MEDIA COMP.
VALUE = 0
:-255 to 255
[ENTER]: Printing
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]DROP.POScorrect
PRINT START :ent
PRINTING
PLEASE WAIT
[1]
DROP.POScorrect<ent>
[1]DROP.POScorrect
PATTERN1 = 0.0
:-40.0 to 40.0
[ENTER]: Printing
* Subsequently, the input screens to
pattern 8 are displayed.
[1]HEATER
SET TEMP. <ent>
PRE PRT AFT
35C 40C 50C
[1]
HEATER <ent>
[1]HEATER
SET TIME <ent>
STANDBY :OFF TIME
10min :NONE
:20 to 50C
* Unit: C or F
:NONE, 0 to 90min
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]PRINT MODE
DRAFT QUALITY <ent>
[1]PRINT MODE
DRAFTquality :STD.
[1]
PRINT MODE <ent>
FAST, FINE
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]PRINT MODE
FINE QUALITY <ent>
[1]PRINT MODE
FINE QUALITY :STD.
FAST, FINE
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]PRINT MODE
SCAN DIRECITON <ent>
[1]PRINT MODE
ScanDIRECTION :Bi-D
Uni-D
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]PRINT MODE
LOGICAL SEEK <ent>
[1]PRINT MODE
LOGICAL SEEK :ON
:OFF
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]PRINT MODE
WhiteLayPrt. <ent>
[1]PRINT MODE
SETUP :OFF
ON (LEVEL1) to LEVEL3
[1]FINE QUALITY
PASS=- :SCAN=HiSPEED
* SS21 6+W Selection is allowed
only for filling.
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]FINE QUALITY
720x540 <ent>
720x720,720x1080,
720x1440
[1]DRAFT QUALITY
[1]DRAFT QUALITY
540x720 <ent>
540x900,540x1080
NormSPD.
[1]INK LAYERS
SETUP :1
[1]
INK LAYERS <ent>
1 to 9
SCAN :PRINT END
0.0s : 0s
[1]
DRYING TYME <ent>
0 to 19.9s, 0 to 999s
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
NormSPD.
8.2.2 SETUP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[1]PRE-FEED
SETUP :OFF
[1]
PRE-FEED <ent>
:ON
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]COLOR PATTERN
SETUP :OFF
[1]
COLOR PATTERN <ent>
:ON
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]REFRESH
SETUP :LEVEL3
[1]
REFRESH <ent>
LEVEL 0 to 3
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]VACUUM
SETUP :STAMDARD
[1]
VACUUM <ent>
OFF, WEAK,
LittleWEAK, STRONG
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]FeedSPEED LEVEL
LEVEL :10 0%
[1]
FeedSPEED LEVEL<ent>
10 to 200%
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[]/ []: Changes screens.
[ENTER]: To the next screen after registration
[FUNCTION]: To the next screen
(Only when INDIVIDUALLY is selected)
[1]AUTO CUT
SETUP :OFF
[1]
AUTO CUT <ent>
:ON
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]PRIORITY
SETUP :INDIVIDUALLY
[1]
PRIORITY <ent>
ALL PANEL, ALL HOST
[1]PRIORITY
MEDIA COMP. :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
HEATER :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
PRINT MODE :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
INK LAYERS :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
DRYING TIME :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
AUTO CUT :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
PRE-FEED :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
COLOR PATTERN :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
FEED SPD.LEVEL :HOST
:PANEL
[1]AUTO CLEANING
SETUP :OFF
[1]
AUTO CLEANING <ent>
:ON
INTERVAL :TYPE
1000mm :NORMAL
10 to 10000mm :SOFT,HARD
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]Print. CLEANING
SETUP :OFF
[1]
Print.CLEANING <ent>
:ON
INTERVAL :TYPE
1000mm :NORMAL
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
*Only when SETUP is ON, the display
changes to the next screen also by
pressing [FUNCTION].
10 to 10000mm:SOFT,HARD
*Only when SETUP is ON, the display
changes to the next screen also by
pressing [FUNCTION].
*
*
[1]PRIORITY
REFRESH :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
VACUUM :HOST
:PANEL
[1]SETUP RESET
RESET :ent
[1]
SETUP RESET <ent>
*Initial operation only for the type currently selected
[1]SETUP COPY
TYPE.1 -> TYPE.2
[1]
SETUP COPY <ent>
TYPE 1 to 4, ALL
COPY : ent
TYPE.1 -> TYPE.2
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
Start of copying
R.1.2
1.2
Rev.
8.2.2 SETUP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[]/ []: Changes screens.
[ENTER]: To the next screen after registration
[FUNCTION]: To the next screen
(Only when INDIVIDUALLY is selected)
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]PRIORITY
SETUP :INDIVIDUALLY
[1]
PRIORITY <ent>
ALL PANEL, ALL HOST
[1]PRIORITY
MEDIA COMP. :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
HEATER :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
PRINT MODE :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
INK LAYERS :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
DRYING TIME :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
AUTO CUT :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
PRE-FEED :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
COLOR PATTERN :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
FEED SPD.LEVEL :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
REFRESH :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
VACUUM :HOST
:PANEL
[1]SETUP RESET
RESET :ent
[1]
SETUP RESET <ent>
*Initial operation only for the type currently selected
[1]PRIORITY
SETUP :INDIVIDUALLY
[1]
PRIORITY <ent>
[1]PRIORITY
MEDIA COMP. :HOST
[1]PRIORITY
HEATER :HOST
[1]FINE QUALITY
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[1]PRIORITY
SETUP :INDIVIDUALLY
ALL PANEL, ALL HOST
[1]PRIORITY
MEDIA COMP. :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
HEATER :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
PRINT MODE :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
INK LAYERS :HOST
:PANEL
[1]PRIORITY
DRYING TIME :HOST
:PANEL
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
R.1.0
1.2
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > MAINTENANCE
1.1
Rev.
8.2.3 MAINTENANCE
CR.MAINTENANCE
COMPLETED :ent
To LOCAL mode after
completion of initial operation
FUNCTION
MAINTENANCE <ENT>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
ST.MAINTENANCE
CARRIAGE OUT <ent>
ST.MAINTENANCE
COMPLETED :ent
MAINTENANCE
ST.MAINTENANCE <ent>
To LOCAL mode after
ST.MAINTENANCE
WIPER REPLACE <ent>
ST.MAINTENANCE
COMPLETED :ent
To LOCAL mode after
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
CR.MAINTENANCE
CARRIAGE OUT :ent
MAINTENANCE
CR.MAINTENANCE <ent>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
ST.MAINTENANCE
NOZZLE WASH <ent>
WIPER CLEANING
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
Fill the liqid.
ST.MAINTENANCE
LEAVING TIME :1min
To LOCAL mode after a
lapse of preset time
ST.MAINTENANCE
PUMP TUBE WASH <ent>
ST.MAINTENANCE
COMPLETED :ent
To LOCAL mode after
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
ST.MAINTENANCE
COSTODY WASH <ent>
WIPER CLEANING
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
Fill the liqid.
ST.MAINTENANCE
LEAVING TIME :1min
To LOCAL mode after a
lapse of preset time
[FUNCTION]: Open/close valves
ST.MAINTENANCE
COMPLETED :ent
To LOCAL mode after
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
HD.MAINTENANCE
FILL UP INK <ent>
FILLING UP
00:00
MAINTENANCE
HD.MAINTENANCE <ent>
HD.MAINTENANCE
DISCHARGE&WASH <ent>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
MMCCYYKK
- DISCHARGE -
00:00
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
12345678
- ABSORPTION -
00:00
Remove:Cartridges
12345678
- DISCHARGE -
00:00
12345678
- ABSORPTION -
00:00
Remove:Cartridges
12345678
- DISCHARGE -
00:00
SELECT:
END< >Re-WASH
Maint.WashLiquid
END< >DISCHARGE
Remove:Maint.Wash - DISCHARGE -
00:00
[FUNCTION]: Open/close valves
CR.MAINTENANCE
Remove the cover: ent
Remove maintenance
cover.
8.2.3 MAINTENANCE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SLEEP SETUP
REFRESH <ent>
SLEEP SETUP
REFRESHinterval= 4h
MAINTENANCE
SLEEP SETUP <ent>
OFF, 1 to 168h
SLEEP SETUP
SLEEP SETUP
WASH INTERVAL = 4h
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
SLEEP SETUP
CLEANING <ent>
SLEEP SETUP
CLEAN. INTERVAL= 4h
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
-WashLiquid UN-FILL-
SLEEP SETUP
CLEAN. TYPE : NORMAL
ROUTINE SETUP
ROUTINE WIPING <ent>
ROUTINE WIPING
SCAN COUNT <ent>
MAINTENANCE
ROUTINE SETUP <ent>
ROUTINE WIPING
TEMP.difference <ent>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
ROUTINE SETUP
REFRESH <ent>
ROUTINE SETUP
REFRESHinterval = 4h
ROUTINE WIPING
SCAN COUNT = 50
ROUTINE WIPING
TEMP.DIFF. = 20C
OFF, 1 to 168h
OFF, 1 to 168h SOFT, HARD
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
WIPER LEVEL
LEVEL :10/10
MAINTENANCE
WIPER LEVEL <ent>
0 to 9990
ROUTINE SETUP
ROUTINE SETUP
WASH INTERVAL = 4h
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
-WashLiquid UN-FILL-
ROUTINE SETUP
CLEANING <ent>
ROUTINE SETUP
CLEAN. INTERVAL = 4h
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
ROUTINE SETUP
CLEAN. TYPE :NORMAL
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
1 to 60
OFF, 1 to 168h
* Displayed momentarily when washing
liquid filling has not been completed
OFF, 1 to 168h SOFT, HARD
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
1/10 to 10/10
InkTankReplace
REPLACE :ent
MAINTENANCE
InkTankReplace <ent>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
* Displayed momentarily when washing
liquid filling has not been completed
HD.MAINTENANCE
MaintWashLiquid <ent>
MaintWashLiquid
FILLING UP <ent>
MaintWashLiquid
FILLING UP START:ent
MaintWashLiquid
CARTRIDGE :none
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
MaintWashLiquid
DISCHARGE <ent>
MaintWashLiquid
DISCHARGE START :ent
Remove:Maint.Wash
MAINTENANCE
Aqua->Sol EXCHG <ent>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
< Select only maintenance mode
R.1.2
1.2
Rev.
8.2.3 MAINTENANCE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEDIA RESIDUAL
SETUP :OFF
MAINTENANCE
MEDIA RESIDUAL <ent>
:ON
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
WHITE MAINTE.
SELECT : LEVEL3
SHAKE WHITE INK
CARTRIDGES :ent
LV.3 > NOZZLE WASH
03:00
REMOVE:INK CARTRIDGE
_W_W____
LV.3 > DISCHARGE
01:30
SET:INK CARTRIDGE
_W_W____
LV.3 > FILLING UP
00:30
LV.3 > CLEANING
02:00
WHITE MAINTE.
SELECT : LEVEL1
SHAKE WHITE INK
CARTRIDGES :ent
MAINTENANCE
WHITE MAINTE. <ent>
LV.1 > NOZZLE WASH
03:00
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
WHITE MAINTE.
SELECT : LEVEL2
SHAKE WHITE INK
CARTRIDGES :ent
LV.2 > NOZZLE WASH
03:00
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
LV.1 > CLEANING
02:00
LV.2 > FILLING UP
00:30
LV.2 > CLEANING
02:00
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.3
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > MACHINE SETUP
1.3
Rev.
8.2.4 MACHINE SETUP
FUNCTION
MACHINE SETUP <ENT>
DEODORIZE FAN
STOP TIME <ent>
DEODORIZE FAN
STOP TIME = 120Min
MACHINE SETUP
DEODORIZE FAN <ent>
DEODORIZE FAN
RENEW <ent>
DEODORIZE FAN
RENEW =OFF
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
OFF,10 to 240min,
CONTINUE
ON
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
DRYNESS FEED
SETUP :OFF
MACHINE SETUP
DRYNESS FEED <ent>
ON
STAMP SETUP
STAMP :OFF
MACHINE SETUP
STAMP SETUP <ent>
ON
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
WasteInkWarning
SETUP :ON
MACHINE SETUP
WasteInkWarning<ent>
OFF
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
TestPrintArrange
SETUP :FEED DIR.
MACHINE SETUP
TestPRT.Arrange<ent>
SCAN DIR.
TEST PRINT: PAGE No
OFF : OFF
ON
*Displayed by press of [FUNCTION]
with Stamp set to ON only in mainte-
nance OPEN mode
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
CART. PRIORITY
SELECT :INK LEVEL
MACHINE SETUP
CART. PRIORITY <ent>
EXP.DATE
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
ENV. TEMP.
SELECT :Wait arrival
MACHINE SETUP
ENV. TEMP. <ent>
Not wait ARR.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Cut Mode
8. Operation Flow
8.1
Basic Operation
8.2
Print Mode
8.3
Cut Mode
8.4
Common Setting
8.5
Service Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Cut Mode > LOCAL / REMOTE
1.1
Rev.
<LOCAL.C> [#01]
CUT1 (30/ 60/ 0.30)
ORIGIN SET UP
0.0 ----
ORIGIN SET UP
-- ORIGIN --
[], [], [], []
MEDIA CUT
<ENT>
MEDIA CUTTING
PLEASE WAIT
[END] :To LOCAL
SETUP DRAWING AREA
0.0 ----
-- DRAWING AREA --
[END] :To LOCAL
[FUNCTION]
[FEED]
CUTTER SCOOTING
<ENT>
PLEASE WAIT
[HEATER/CUTER]
TEST CUT
<ENT>
-- TEST CUT --
[TEST PRINT/TEST CUT]
MEDIA FEED
: 0.1m
-- MEDIA FEED --
[CLEANING/FEED]
[PEN]
[CUT2]
DATA CLEAR
<ENT>
-- DATA CLEAR --
[DATA CLEAR]
TEMPERATURE CONTROL!
PLEASE WAIT
PRE PRT AFT
35C 35C 35C
[REMOTE] *
-REMOTE.C- [#01]
CUT1 (30/ 60/ 0.30)
Target temperature reached / [ENTER]
- Not displayed when target
temperature has been reached.
SS21INK MMCCYYKK
REMAIN 99999999
HEAD HEIGHT: Thin
MEDIA WIDTH: 1000mm
[ENTER]
CJV30-100 V1.00
MRL-III V1.30 - Not displayed when target
temperature has been reached.
(Same as in PRINT MODE.)
NON-ORIGINAL INK
MMCCYYKK
[FUNCTION]
[] + []: Changes error display
[]: To the next screen
[]: To the previous screen
[END]: To LOCAL
- At occurrence of error
[MODE CHANGE]
Enters PRINT MODE
:0.1 to 51.0m
SPD PRS OFS
[CUT1] 30 60 0.30
[USER TYPE/TOOL]
DIST.COMP. [CUT1]
<ENT>
[FUNCTION] DIST.COMP. [CUT1]
X = 500 Y = 200
DIST.COMP. [CUT1]
DRAW SHIFT = 0mm
DIST.COMP. [CUT1]
XR = 0.0 XL = 0.0
DIST.COMP. [CUT1]
Y = 0.0
[END] :To LOCAL [END] :To LOCAL
Pattern drawing
[] / []
HEATER Power-off
<ent>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-REMOTE.1- [#01]
0.00m
-REMOTE.C- [#01]
[ENTER]
[REMOTE]
-REMOTE.C- [#01]
CUT1 (30/ 60/ 0.30)
[] / []: Changes speed
<LOCAL.C> [#01]
CUT1 (30/ 60/ 0.30)
<LOCAL.C> [#01]
CUT1 (30/ 60/ 0.30)
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Cut Mode > LOCAL / REMOTE
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Cut Mode > SETUP
1.2
Rev.
8.3.2 SETUP
FUNCTION C
SETUP <ENT>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
:CUT2
:CUT3
:PEN
:HALF
ENDS :HIGH [H_____H]
INNER:OFF No.6to1
ENDS :HIGH [H_____H]
INNER:OFF No.6to1
SETUP
SELECT :CUT1
[CUT1]
PINCH ROLLER <ent>
[FUNCTION]: To the next screen [FUNCTION]: To the previous screen
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[CUT1]MARK DETECT
DETECT :OFF
[CUT1]MARK DETECT
DIST.REVI. :OFF
[CUT1]
MARK DETECT <ent>
:1pt
:2pt X
:2pt Y
:3pt
:4pt
[CUT1]MARK DETECT
SIZE = 10mm
:4 to 40
[CUT1]MARK DETECT
OFFSET Y() = 0.0mm
[CUT1]MARK DETECT
OFFSET X(|) = 0.0mm
:-40.0 to 40.0 :-40.0 to 40.0
[CUT1]MARK DETECT
FORM :TYPE1
:TYPE2
[CUT1]MARK DETECT
COPIES Y() = 1
[CUT1]MARK DETECT
COPIES X(|) = 1
:0 to 9999 :0 to 9999
[ON]: To the next screen
[CUT1]CUT MODE
SETUP :STD.
[CUT1]
CUT MODE <ent>
:FAST
:FINE
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[CUT1]AUTO CUT
SETUP :OFF
[CUT1]
AUTO CUT <ent>
:ON
[CUT1]AUTO CUT
CUT MARGIN = 30mm
:0 to 50
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[CUT1]MARK DETECT
SPEED LIMIT = 1cm/s
:0 to 60
[CUT1]MARK DETECT
SKEW CHECK = 0mm
:0 to 99
[CUT1]P/C ADJUST
P/C SCALE ADJ. <ent>
P/C SCALE ADJ.
CLEAR < > PRINT
P/C SCALE ADJ.
DIRECTION = +
P/C SCALE ADJ.
ADJ.VALUE = 5
[CUT1]P/C ADJUST
P/C ORIGIN OFS. <ent>
P/C ORIGIN OFS.
540dpi <ent>
P/C ORIGIN OFS.
PRINT START :ent
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
P/C ORIGIN OFS.
Y = 0 X = 0
[CUT1]
P/C ADJUST <ent>
Adjust misalignment
Remove the printed &
cut pattern
:720dpi
:-
Check misalignment of
the pattern 0
Print all the pattern.
Cut the pattern 0.
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
Cut the pattern 1 to 9
Enter the fit pattern
8.3.2 SETUP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[CUT1]MEDIA TYPE
TYPE :STANDARD
[CUT1]
MEDIA TYPE <ent>
:HEAVY
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[CUT1]SORTING
SETUP :OFF
[CUT1]
SORTING <ent>
:ON
[CUT1]SORTING
AUTO FEED :OFF
:ON
[CUT1]SORTING
AREA :OFF
:10 to 5100
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[CUT1]ADJ-PRS OFFSET
OFFSET = 3
[CUT1]
ADJ-PRS OFFSET <ent>
:0 to 7
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[CUT1]WINDER TIMMING
SETUP :OFF
[CUT1]
WINDER TIMMING <ent>
:OFF
:1 to 99
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[CUT1]OVER CUT
LENGTH : 0.1mm
[CUT1]
OVER CUT <ent>
:OFF
:0.1 to 1.0
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[CUT1]SETUP COPY
CUT1 -> CUT2
[CUT1]
SETUP COPY <ent>
CUT1 to 3
PEN
HALF
ALL
[CUT1]SETUP RESET
RESET :ent
[CUT1]
SETUP RESET <ent>
*Except when PEN is selected
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[CUT1]VACUUM
SETUP :STRONG
[CUT1]
VACUUM <ent>
:OFF
:WEAK
:LittleWEAK
:STANDARD
COPY : ent
CUT1 -> CUT2
Start of copying
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[HALF]HALF CUT
SETUP :OFF
[HALF]
HALF CUT <ent>
:ON
[HALF]HALF CUT
HALF CUT PRES.= 0g
:0 to 300
[HALF]HALF CUT
HALF LENGTH = 0.5mm
:0.1 to 5.0
[HALF]HALF CUT
CUT LENGTH = 10mm
:5 to 150
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[[CUT1]UP SPEED
SETUP :AUTO
[CUT1]
UP SPEED <ent>
:5cm/s
:10cm/s
:20cm/s
:30cm/s
When HALF is
selected
[CUT1]DUMMY CUT
SETUP :OFF
[CUT1]
DUMMY CUT <ent>
:ON
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
*Except when PEN is selected
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[CUT1]DIVISION CUT
SETUP :OFF
[CUT1]
DIVISION CUT <ent>
:ON
[CUT1]DIVISION CUT
FRAME CUT :OFF
:ON
[CUT1]DIVISION CUT
MARK CUT :OFF
:ON
[]/[]/ [ON]:To the next screen
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Cut Mode > SETUP
1.2
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Cut Mode > MAINTENANCE / No. COPIES
1.2
Rev.
8.3.3 MAINTENANCE / No. COPIES
Motion
FUNCTION C
MAINTENANCE <ENT>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
MARK SENSOR
SENSOR CHECK <ent>
SENSOR CHECK
ORIGIN SET :ent
MAINTENANCE
MARK SENSOR <ent>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
SENSOR CHECK
SIZE = 10mm
:4 to 40
SENSOR CHECK
FORM :TYPE1
:TYPE2
MARK SENSOR
POINTER OFFSET <ent>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
POINTER OFFSET
Y = 0.0 X = 0.0
MARK SENSOR
LEVEL ADJUST <ent>
LEVEL ADJUST
OUT: 0000 IN: 0000
[FUNCTION]: Turns off the motor /
Executes initial operation
after completion.
Press [ENTER] when the value is stable.
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
SAMPLE CUT
SELECT :LOGO
SAMPLE CUT
LOGO :100%
MAINTENANCE
SAMPLE CUT <ent>
SAMPLE CUT
CUT START :ent
:1 to 999 :CUT
When CUT is selected: next screen will be skipped.
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
MEDIA CUT
INTERVAL = 500mm
MEDIA CUT
FRONT CUT OFF = 30mm
MAINTENANCE
MEDIA CUT <ent>
MEDIA CUT
COUNT = 1
:0 to 9999 :0 to 500 :10 to 10000
TOOL REPLACE
ACTION :ent
TOOL REPLACE
COMPLETED :ent
MAINTENANCE C
TOOL REPLACE <ent>
[ENTER]: Moves the heads to the
maintenance position
and turns off the motor.
No. COPIES
COPIES = 1
No. COPIES
INTERVAL = 2mm
FUNCTION C
No. COPIES <ENT>
:0 to 30 :0 to 999
[USER TYPE/TOLL]
-At this point, the heads can be
moved by hand.
-Perform tool change.
Move the heads with JOG key.
SENSOR CHECK
SPEED = 10cm/s
:0 to 20
[]/[ENTER]: Executes Motion 1.
[]: Executes Motion 2.
Pattern drawing
Enters REMOTE mode and
performs pattern drawing.
To LOCAL mode after
completion of initial operation.
starts operation.
STEP SIZE
SIZE = 0.025
MAINTENANCE
STEP SIZE <ent>
:0.025/0.01
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Common Setting
8. Operation Flow
8.1
Basic Operation
8.2
Print Mode
8.3
Cut Mode
8.4
Common Setting
8.5
Service Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.1
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Common Setting > COMMON SETUP
1.1
Rev.
8.4.1 COMMON SETUP
FUNCTION
COMMON SETUP <ENT>
PR SETUP
SELECT :ON
COMMON SETUP
PR SETUP <ent>
:POW ON ONLY
:PR No.ONLY
:OFF
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
CUT METHOD
SETUP :2 STEP
COMMON SETUP
CUT METHOD <ent>
:3 STEP
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
CONFIRM. FEED
FEED :100mm
COMMON SETUP
CONFIRM. FEED <ent>
OFF/ 10 to 500
CONFIRM. FEED
BACK FEED :ON
:OFF
EXPANDS
SETUP :OFF
COMMON SETUP
EXPANDS <ent>
:ON
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
RECEIVED DATA
SETUP :AUTO
COMMON SETUP
RECEIVED DATA <ent>
:MANUAL
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
TIME SET
2007.10.05 21:36:00
COMMON SETUP
TIME SET <ent>
:ON
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
TIME SET
2007.10.05 21:36:00
TIME SET
DoYou change it?:ent
-> 2008.10.04 21:36
2007.10.05 21:36:00
[FUNCTION]
TEMP. : LENGTH
C : mm
COMMON SETUP
UNIT SETUP <ent>
F : inch
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
MACHINE NAME
CJV30-01
COMMON SETUP
MACHINE NAME <ent>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
KEY BUZZER
SETUP :ON
COMMON SETUP
KEY BUZZER <ent>
:OFF
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
INFORMATION
ERROR HISTORY <ent>
COMMON SETUP
INFORMATION <ent>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
ERROR HISTORY
[01] 05.09.29 08:18
----- ERROR 09 -----
HDC ERROR (----)
[01] 05.09.29 08:18
>> CARRIAGE OUT
INFORMATION
MAINTE. HISTORY<ent>
[FUNCTION], [] / []
[] / []: Changes screens.
[] / []: Changes error display.
[END]: Complete
-
-
[01] 720x1080 .12
Bd.Vd.x1.1L: 12.34m
INFORMATION
PRINTmodeHIST. <ent>
-
PRINTmodeHIST.
[01] 05.09.29 08:18
LIST
SELECT:PRINT MODE
INFORMATION
LIST <ent>
LIST
-- PRINTING --
-- There is no --
-- HISTORY. --
-When there is no history
[FUNCTION], [] / []
[FUNCTION], [] / []
[FUNCTION], [] / []
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
-Displayed only when [FEED : ON]
LEFT : RIGHT
0mm : 0mm
COMMON SETUP
MARGIN <ent>
0 to 85mm
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
8.4.1 COMMON SETUP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[FUNCTION], [] / []
05. 09.29 09:57[ 0]
0823-01-01.0000.0000
INFORMATION
EVENT LOG <ent>
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
REPLACE COUNTER
CART. 1: 0
INFORMATION
REPLACE COUNTER <ent>
-Displayed the same way for cartridges 1 to 8
REPLACE COUNTER
SCAN : 0
-Displayed only in Service mode is open
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
REPLACE COUNTER
TIME : 0h
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
REPLACE COUNTER
WIPER : 0
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
REPLACE COUNTER
PUMP : 0
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
H1A:ALL =123,456,789
Sdot= 13,579,135
H1A:Mdot=123,456,789
Ldot= 13,579,135
-Displayed the same way
for nozzles A to H
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
REPLACE COUNTER
LENGTH : 0m
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
REPLACE COUNTER
AREA : 0m
2
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
CJV30-160 V1.00
MRL-III V1.00
INFORMATION
VERSION <ent>
FPGA-PDC V1.00
FPGA-HDC V1.00
S/N = 00000000
D/N = 00000000
INFORMATION
Serial&DealerNo<ent>
[FUNCTION], [] / []
-Displayed only in Maintenance
Open mode
[FUNCTION], [] / []
INFORMATION
InkREPL Report <ent>
Start printing
[FUNCTION], [] / []
SLEEP REF.: 0H00M
CNT :
SLEEP CLN.: 0H00M
CNT :
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
SLEEP TUBE: 0H00M
CNT :
[FUNCTION],
[] / []
R.1.2
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Common Setting > COMMON SETUP
1.2
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode
8. Operation Flow
8.1
Basic Operation
8.2
Print Mode
8.3
Cut Mode
8.4
Common Setting
8.5
Service Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #ADJUST
1.0
Rev.
8.5.1 #ADJUST
#HEAD ADJUST
SLANT ADJUST <ent>
#SLANT ADJUST
PRINT START :ent
#HEAD ADJUST
DROP.POS ADJUST <ent>
#DROP POS. MODE
#DROP POS. MODE
:Normal-SCAN
#ADJUST / PRINT
HEAD ADJUST <ent>
#DROP POS. HsHg
SELECT :DRAFT
#DROP POS. HsHg/DRFT
ADJUST :Y Bi
Y Bi PRINT :ent
#DROP POS. HsHg
SELECT :FINE
ADJUST :FINE-Y Bi
FINE-Y Bi PRINT :ent
#DROP POS. HsHg
SELECT :BASIS SET
BASIS SET :ent
#HEAD ADJUST
HeadcondCONFIRM<ent>
#HeadcondCONFIRM
INKvolumCONFIRM<ent>
#INKvolumCONFIRM
PRINT START :ent
M= 0 M= 0 C= 0 C= 0
Y= 0 Y= 0 K= 0 K= 0
:-2 to 4
#HeadcondCONFIRM
X POS. CONFIRM <ent>
#HeadcondCONFIRM
Y POS. CONFIRM <ent>
[FUNCTION] / [] / []
[] / []
#X POS. CONFIRM
PRINT START :ent
#Y POS. CONFIRM
PRINT START :ent
-[FUNCTION]: All nozzles +1
[REMOTE]: Displays the nozzle row name.
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ENT>
[] / []
[] / []
[] / []
[] / []
[] / []
[ENTER] / [END]
Y Bi H1 -H1 : 0.0
Y Bi H1 -H1 : 0.0
#ADJUST / PRINT
EDGE ADJUST <ent>
[] / []
#EDGE ADJUST
CLEAR < > PRINT
#EDGE ADJUST
L=15.0 R=15.0
#ADJUST / PRINT
500mm SQUARE <ent>
#500mm SQUARE
CLEAR < > PRINT
#500mm SQUARE
X=500.0 Y=500.0
Only at the factory
[]/ []: Modifies the compensation value.
Adjustment pattern
drawing
Pattern drawing
Pattern drawing
Pattern drawing
Pattern drawing
Pattern drawing
Pattern drawing
Pattern drawing
8.5.1 #ADJUST
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
#ADJUST / PRINT
MEDIA COMP.2 <ent>
[] / []
#MEDIA COMP.2
PRINT START :ent
#MEDIA COMP.2
VALUE = 0
#ADJUST / PRINT
CAPPING <ent>
[] / []
#CAPPING
CAPPING POS= 0.0mm
#CAPPING
FlushingPOS= 0.0mm
#CAPPING
AirPullPOS.= 0.0mm
#CAPPING
WiperPOS(X)= 0
#HEAD ID/ --------
-------- --------
#ADJUST / PRINT
HEAD ID <ent>
[] / []
Do you change an
ink set? NO < > YES
#ADJUST / PRINT
HEAD WASH <ent>
MMCCYYKK
- DISCHARGE -
00:00
12345678
- ABSORPTION -
00:00
Remove:Cartridges
12345678
- DISCHARGE -
00:00
12345678
- ABSORPTION -
00:00
Remove:Cartridges
12345678
- DISCHARGE -
00:00
Clean a wiper.
COMPLETED :ent
END< >CONTINUE
V Re-WASH
Set:TRANS Liquid
12345678
- ABSORPTION -
00:00
Remove:TRANS Liquid
12345678
- DISCHARGE -
00:00
Maint.WashLiquid
END< >DISCHARGE
Remove:Maint.Wash
12345678
- DISCHARGE -
00:00
TRANS Liquid
END < >ABSORB
Set:TRANS Liquid
- ABSORPTION -
00:00
Remove:TRANS Liquid - DISCHARGE -
00:00
[] / []
#500mm SQUARE
CLEAR < > DRAW
#500mm SQUARE
dX = 0.0 dY = 0.0
#500mm SQUARE
ANGLE ADJUST = 0.25
#ADJUST / CUT
500mm SQUARE <ent>
[] / []
Pattern drawing
Pattern drawing
R.1.1
1.1
Rev.
8.5.1 #ADJUST
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-Selection of drawing type
[]: Square and straight line
[]: Broken line
[FUNCTION]: Radial lines consecutively
[REMOTE]: Squares consecutively
#PEN PRESSURE
0g = 0
#PEN PRESSURE
30g = 0
#PEN PRESSURE
60g = 0
#ADJUST / CUT
PEN PRESSURE <ent>
#PEN PRESSURE
100g = 0
#PEN PRESSURE
200g = 0
[] / []
#LANDING
DOWN LANDING = 0
#ADJUST / CUT
LANDING <ent>
#LANDING
UP = 0 END = 0g
Switching to cut landing
adjustment
- [FEED]: Returns to PEN landing adjustment
[END]: MENU
#PHOTO SENSOR
SENSOR LV. <ent>
#PHOTO SENS./ LV.
OUT: 0000 IN: 0000
#ADJUST / CUT
PHOTO SENSOR <ent>
[] / []
[] / []
#PHOTO SENSOR
POSITION <ent>
START :ent
X = 0.0 Y = 0.0
[] / []
#PEN PRESSURE
400g = 0
#ADJUST
GR/PR POSITION <ent>
#GR/PR POSITION
CUTTER SCOOTING :ent
LEVER UP SET:PR POSITION
LEVER DOWN
#GR/PR POSITION
ACTION :ent
- failure -
Lever DOWN Lever UP
-To the next step when it is already
at maintenance position
When self-adjustment fails
#ADJUST
MOTOR CURRENT <ent>
[] / []
#MOTOR CURRENT
STOP ADJUST <ent>
X = 140 Y = 140
( 0 ) ( 0 )
[] / []
#MOTOR CURRENT
X MOVING ADJUT <ent>
#X MOVING ADJUT
S=10 A=0.10 X=100
#X MOVING ADJUT
140 ( 0 )
[] / []
#MOTOR CURRENT
Y MOVING ADJUT <ent>
#Y MOVING ADJUT
S=50 A=0.10 X=100
#Y MOVING ADJUT
140 ( 0 )
[] / []
#ADJUST
SERIAL No. <ent>
[] / []
#SERIAL No.
00000000
#ADJUST
DEALER No. <ent>
[] / []
#DEALER No.
00000000
Drawing &
self-adjustment
-To the next step when the
lever is in the UP position
PRINT/CUT POS.
ORIGIN SET :ent
#ADJUST
PRINT/CUT POS. <ent>
PRINT/CUT POS.
Y = 0.0 X = 0.0
[] / []
Print & Pen drawing
-Displace the origin to the left 30 mm
or more by operating JOG keys.
-Set the pen tip to the origin of the
print result by operating JOG keys.
#LANDING
UP POSITION = 0
[ENTER] / [END], [UTYPE] : Returns
#LANDING / CUT
DOWN LANDING = 0
-
[UTYPE]
[FEED]
R.1.1
1.1
Rev.
8.5.1 #ADJUST
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Only at the factory
#ADJUST
DEFAULT SET <ent>
[] / []
#DEFAULT SET
SETUP PARAMETER<ent>
SETUP PARAMETER
INITIALIZE OK? :ent
[] / []
[] / []
#ADJUST
REPLACE PARTS <ent>
#REPLACE PARTS
REGISTRATION <ent>
#REPLACE PARTS
PARTS :PUMP
[] / []
-PUMP
00.00.?? : No.1
Various parameters
#DEFAULT SET
SHIPPING SETUP <ent>
ToSHIPPING condition
Set up OK ? :ent
[] / []
#REPLACE PARTS
PARTS :CAP
-CAP
00.00.?? : No.1
[] / []
#REPLACE PARTS
PARTS :DUMPER
-DUMPER
00.00.??:No.1-A
#REPLACE PARTS
HISTORY <ent>
-HEAD
[ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2
-- There is no --
-- HISTORY. --
When there is no history
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #TEST
1.0
Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST
#CHECK PATTERN
PATTERN:100%
DPI :540x720
SCAN:Uni-D / PASS:6
#CHECK PATTERN
PATTERN:COLOR CHART
DPI :540x720
SCAN:Uni-D / PASS:6
X=1000 Y=1000
DENSITY :ALL
#TEST
CHECK PATTERN <ent>
[] / []
FUNCTION
#TEST <ENT>
[ENTER] / [END]
[] / []
X=1000 Y=1000
COLOR :KMCY
#CHECK PATTERN
PATTERN:DROP.POS CHK
DPI :540x720
SCAN:Uni-D / PASS:6
X=1000 Y=1000
[] / []
#CHECK PATTERN/100%
PRINT START :ent
540x720.V6. 6P,Uni
x1.H1 0.00m
DPI: 540x720.PAS: 6
SCN:Uni SPD:x1 WF:6
HED:1 CL:MCYK1234
X=10 Y=10
#CHECK PATTERN/100%
Hi-SPEED SCAN :OFF
-Subsequently, 50%, 25%, 12.5%, 6.25%,
nozzle check can be selected (Omitted).
JOG permitted
[FUNCTION]
[REMOTE]
#TEST
ALL PATTERN <ent>
[] / []
#ALL PATTERN
PRINT START :ent
[] / []
#TEST
MOTOR TEST <ent>
#MOTOR TEST
X SERVO MOTOR <ent>
#X SERVO - RUNNING -
COUNT = 0
#X SERVO MOTOR
S= 500 A=0.50 X=1000
#MOTOR TEST
Y SERVO MOTOR <ent>
#Y SERVO - RUNNING -
COUNT = 0
#Y SERVO MOTOR
S= 500 A=0.50 X=1000
Pressing [HEATER/CUTTER] displays
the heater control screen.
#MOTOR TEST
XY SERVO MOTOR <ent>
#XYservo - RUNNING -
COUNT = 0
S= 500 A=0.50 X=1000
S= 500 A=0.50 X=1000
#MOTOR TEST
WIPER MOTOR <ent>
#WIPER - RUNNING -
COUNT = 0
SPEED :WAIT :COUNT
100 : 0 :CONT.
#WIPER - RUNNING -
100 : 0 :CONT.
[] / []
#MOTOR TEST
PUMP MOTOR <ent>
#PUMP MOTOR
COUNT = 0
#PUMP MOTOR
SPD=1200 DIR=FORW.
[] / []
<CARRIDGE>:< MOTOR >
IN : OFF
S= 500 A=0.50 X=1000
S= 500 A=0.50 X=1000
[] / []
#Y SERVO - RUNNING -
S= 500 A=0.50 X=1000
[] / []
[] / []
#X SERVO - RUNNING -
S= 500 A=0.50 X=1000
[] / []: Changes condition display.
Pattern drawing
8.5.2 #TEST
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
#MOTOR TEST
TAKE-UP MOTOR <ent>
#TAKE-UP MOTOR
--- RUNNING ---
#TAKE-UP MOTOR
START :ent
#HEATER TEST
TEMPERATURE <ent>
[FUNCTION] / [] / []
#TEST
HEATER TEST <ent>
[] / []
PRE PRT AFT
35C 35C 35C
35C 35C 35C
(35C 35C 35C)
[] / []
#HEATER TEST
SSR <ent>
<15F> <15F> <15F>
OFF OFF OFF
PRE PRT AFT
35C 35C 35C
#WARMING TEST
OFF [ C] ( 20 C)
#TEST
WARMING TEST <ent>
[] / []
#TEST
ACTION TEST <ent>
#ACTION TEST
VACUUM FAN :LOW
#ACTION TEST
Y-CUTTER :OFF
#ACTION TEST
LED POINTER :OFF
#ACTION TEST
DEOD. FAN :OFF
#ACTION TEST
DRY FAN :OFF
HDC FAN1 : HDC FAN2
ON : ON
#ACTION TEST
PR SOLENOID :OFF
- [] / []: Changes items in a loop.
#ACTION TEST
P.HEAD SOLENOID :OFF
#ACTION TEST
VACUUM FAN :LOW
#TEST
SENSOR TEST <ent>
[] / []
#SENSOR TEST
SET LEVER :ON
#SENSOR TEST
R.PAPER :OFF
#SENSOR TEST
Y-ORIGIN :OFF
#SENSOR TEST
WIPER :OFF
#SENSOR TEST
FRONT COVER :ON
#SENSOR TEST
HEAD HEIGHT :OFF
#SENSOR TEST
PR SENSOR :OFF
-This screen can be displayed by
pressing [FUNCTION] on any
screen.
#SENSOR TEST
CUT HEAD JOINT :OFF
#SENSOR TEST
PRT.HEAD JOINT :OFF
-[JOG]: Changes items in a loop.
-The items are displayed in the order shown in Sensor Test Menu. ON = o, OFF = x
L : SET LEVER P : R.PAPER
Y : Y-ORIGIN W : WIPER
H : HEAD HEIGHT PR: PR SENSOR
CJ : CUT HEAD JOINT PJ : PRT.HEAD JOINT
L=o P=o Y=x W=x
H=o PR=x CJ=x PJ=o
#SENSOR TEST
Head Voltage :700
#SENSOR TEST
Main PCB ID :800
#OPTION / REEL = ON
EXH.= ON DRY = ON
#TEST
OPTION <ent>
[] / []
#TEST
KEYBOARD LED <ent>
HEAT:ooo CONST.:ooo
PRINT :o CUT :o
[] / []
#TEST
KEYBOARD TEST <ent>
#KEYBOARD TEST
Key-> NONE
[] / []
#TEST
LCD TEST <ent>
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
""""""""""""""""""""
#KEYBOARD TEST
Key-> [USER TYPE]
#KEYBOARD TEST
[END]->END TEST
-Displayed corresponding to a
pressed key.
[] / []
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[] / []
#TEST
TIMER CHECK <ent>
#TIMER CHECK
2007.10.05 21:36:00
#TIMER CHECK
2007.10.05 21:36:00
#TIMER CHECK
DoYou change it?:ent
-> 2008.10.04 21:36
2007.10.05 21:36:00
[FUNCTION]
#TEST
MEMORY CHECK <ent>
#MEMORY CHECK
CHECK:MAIN.SDRAM
#MEMORY CHECK
WAIT TIME :OFF
#MAIN.SDRAM CHECK
COUNT= 1
WriteData=h'--------
Road Data=h'--------
[] / []
[] / []
- MAIN.SDRAM ERROR -
address = h'--------
[] / []
-Error occurs.
#MEMORY CHECK
CHECK:MAIN.F-ROM
#MAIN.F-ROM CHECK
COUNT= 1
---- ERROR 85 ----
ROM HASH
[] / []
-Error occurs.
#MEMORY CHECK
CHECK:HEAD.EEPROM
#HEAD.EEPROM CHECK
COUNT= 1
-HEAD.EEPROM ERROR -
[] / []
-Error occurs.
[] / []
#MEMORY CHECK
CHECK:32M SDRAM
#32M SDRAM CHECK
COUNT= 1
- 32M.SDRAM ERROR -
-Error occurs.
[] / []
[] / []
#TEST
SKEW CHECK <ent>
#SKEW CHECK
FEED :3m
#SKEW CHECK
-- FEED 3m --
[] / []
#TEST
TEMP.CHECK <ent>
#TEMP.CHECK
HEAD TEMP. <ent>
#HEAD TEMP.
30 C (----)
[] / []
#TEMP.CHECK
NOZZLE TEMP. <ent>
#NOZZLE TEMP.
CHECK = OK
[] / []
#TEMP.CHECK
HEAT SINK TEMP.<ent>
#HEAT SINK TEMP.
30 C (----)
#TEMP.CHECK
SLIDER TEMP. <ent>
#SLIDER TEMP.
30 C (----)
[] / []
Motion
#TEST
LINEAR ENCODER <ent>
#LINEAR ENCODER
ActiveWIDTH :1900mm
M =0000.0 E =0000.0
Mc= 0.0 Ec= 0.0
<<Coord. of point >>
Ms=000000 Es=000000
Mm=000000 Em=000000
Mr=000000 Er=000000
<<CommonCoord.SYS>>
ERR(ME-LE) = 00.00mm
MotorENC = 0000.00mm
LinearENC= 0000.00mm
[FUNCTION] Completed
[] / []
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-[FUNCTION]: Turns on/off all valves.
[] / []
#TEST
INK CARTRIDGE <ent>
#INK CARTRIDGE
PACK&END SENSOR<ent>
PACK 1234 5678
END 1234 5678
[] / []
#INK CARTRIDGE
CARTRIDGE VALVE<ent>
#CARTRIDGE VALVE
oooo oooo
CNT=1 NG=1
1234 5678
[] / []
#INK CARTRIDGE
CARTRIDGE LED <ent>
ERROR : oooo oooo
ACTIVE : oooo oooo
[] / []
#INK CARTRIDGE
INK-IC CHECK <ent>
#INK-IC CHECK
1234 5678
CNT=1
1234 5678
-Pressing [FUNCTION] moves the
cursor to ERROR or ACTIVE.
-When there is no ERROR.
#TEST
WASH CARTRIDGE <ent>
#WASH CARTRIDGE
PACK&END SENSOR<ent>
#PACK&END SENSOR
PACK :ON END :OFF
[] / []
#WASH CARTRIDGE
CARTRIDGE VALVE<ent>
#CARTRIDGE VALVE
OPEN
[] / []
#WASH CARTRIDGE
IC CHECK <ent>
#IC CHECK
CHECK START :ent
#IC CHECK
CNT=1 NG=0
#IC CHECK
CNT=1 NG=0
Counting stops.
#IC CHECK
NO CARTRIDGE
When the cartridge is absent.
#PEN PRESSURE
IN = 0x200
#TEST
PEN PRESSURE <ent>
[] / []
#MARK LED
SensLED = 111 ( 7mA)
#MARK LED
SPD = 10cm/s DIR = X
#MARK LED
in= mA : out=0x0000
#TEST
MARK LED <ent>
[] / []
#MARK LED
OUT :0000 IN: 0000
[FUNCTION]
Initializing operation
#HEAD JOINT
ACTION :ent
#HEAD JOINT
COUNT = 0
#HEAD JOINT
COUNT = 0
#TEST
HEAD JOINT <ent>
Counting stops.
[] / []
[] / []
#PINCHI ROLLER
Select : L>O>L>M>L>H
#PINCHI ROLLER
PINCH ROLLER No. = 7
#PINCHI ROLLER
ACTION :ent
#TEST
PINCH ROLLER <ent>
#PINCHI ROLLER 10
Select : L>O>L>M>L>H
Counting stops.
#PINCHI ROLLER
HHHHHHH <No.1:HIGH>
[FUNCTION]
Motion
#SolenoidTIMEOUT
ACTION :ent
#SolenoidTIMEOUT
0.0sec
#SolenoidTIMEOUT
0.0sec
#TEST
SolenoidTIMEOUT<ent>
[] / []
Counting stops.
[] / []
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
#CUT PATTERN /SQUARE
COUNT = 1
[] / []
#CUT PATTERN
PATTERN :SQUARE
XY = 15mm COUNT= 1
DRAW START :ent
[] / []
#CUT PATTERN
PATTERN :10m
#CUT PATTERN / 10m
DRAW START :ent
[] / []
#CUT PATTERN
PATTERN :2m
#CUT PATTERN / 2m
DRAW START :ent
[] / []
#CUT PATTERN
PATTERN :QUALITY
#CUT PATTERN/QUALITY
DRAW START :ent
#CUT PATTERN
PATTERN :TEST
#CUT PATTERN / TEST
Number of Times= 1
#CUT PATTERN / TEST
DRAW START :ent
#TEST
CUT PATTERN <ent>
#OPTION OUTPUT
OUT1: OFF OUT2: OFF
#TEST
OPTION OUTPUT <ent>
[] / []
The number of times is not limited
when [Number of Times = 0].
performs drawing.
performs drawing.
performs drawing.
performs drawing.
R.1.0
1.0
Rev.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R.1.0
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #PARAMETER
1.0
Rev.
8.5.3 #PARAMETER
SYSTEM PARAMETER
000:COMP. X = 0
----> 0
000:COMP. X = 0
#PARAMETER
SYSTEM PARAM. <ent>
FUNCTION
#PARAMETER <ENT>
[ENTER] / [END]
ALL PARAMETER
INITIALIZE ? :ent
[] / []
INITIAL=1
Initializing
all parameters
CLOSED PARAMETER
INITIALIZE ? :ent
INITIAL=3
Initializing the
non-disclosed parameters
SYSTEM PARAMETER
INITIALIZE ? :ent
INITIAL=2
Initializing the system
parameters
MAINTENANCEparameter
000:DIR = 0
----> 1
000:DIR = 0
#PARAMETER
MAINTE PARAM. <ent>
MAINTENANCEparameter
INITIALIZE ? :ent
[] / []
CUSTOMIZE PARAMETER
000:EDGE LV = 50
----> 100
000:EDGE LV = 50
#PARAMETER
CUSTOM PARAM. <ent>
CUSTOMIZE PARAMETER
INITIALIZE ? :ent
[] / []
RUNNING PARAMETER
000:CAPC.H1 = 0
----> 3000
000:CAPC.H1 = 0
#PARAMETER
RUNNING PARAM. <ent>
RUNNING PARAMETER
INITIALIZE ? :ent
[] / []
EXCHANGE PARAMETER
000:Hd.nn01 = 0
----> 3
000:Hd.nn01 = 0
#PARAMETER
EXCHANGE PARAM. <ent>
[] / []
INK-SYSTEM PARAMETER
000:LEVELsw = 0
----> 1
000:LEVELsw = 0
#PARAMETER
INKSYSTEM PARAM <ent>
INK-SYSTEM PARAMETER
INITIALIZE ? :ent
Printed in Japan
D500387-13-05112010
2010 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
IT
FW: 2.5

MIMAKI CJV30-60 Series Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MIMAKI CJV30-60 Series Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MIMAKI CJV30-60 Series Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What test modes are described?

What test modes are described?

What is the document about?

What is the document about?

MIMAKI ENGINERRING CO., LTD.

URL: ht t p: / / www. mi maki . co. j p/ engl i sh/ t op

6 Initial operation of the printer 1. Refer to "1.1.3 Initial Machine Operation" .

4 End 1. Executing cleaning

3 End 1. Dry suction for 20 seconds

3 End 1. Stopping the pump motor

2 Cleaning 1. Insert washing liquid cartridges (into all the slots).

4 Repeating 1. Executing 2 to 3 again.

2 Filling 1. Run the pump.

Step Processing Description

2 Discharge 1. Run the pump.

Display during maintenance

2 Waste ink tank reaches near

CJV30-60/100/130/160, CJV30-60BS/100BS/130BS/160BS, TPC-1000

Unable to turn ON the machine.

Abnormal ink firing.

Error displayed on LCD pannel.

ERROR 200 HEAD MEMORY

ERROR 202 DEVICE CONSTRUCTION

ERROR 205 47V HEAD VOLTAGE

Other (describe problem specifically)

Operate normally with no problems.

Nozzle dropout/Ink deflection/Abnormal firing start to occur.

Electric power failure or instant blackout occurred.

Sometimes Error and Warning message appeared.

ERROR 200 HEAD MEMORY

ERROR 202 DEVICE CONSTRUCTION

ERROR 205 47V HEAD VOLTAGE

ERROR 40 MOTOR ALARM X

ERROR 41 MOTOR ALARM Y

ERROR 42 X OVER CURRENT

ERROR 43 Y OVER CURRENT

Other (describe problem specifically)

Head FFC ASSY [ ]

HDC FFC ASSY [ ]

Fuse of Main PCB [ ]

You might also like